2002 3.2 CL Owner s Manual

2002 3.2 CL Owner s Manual
2002 CL Online Reference Owner's Manual
Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference.
For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.
Contents
Owner's Identification Form
Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... i
A Few Words About Safety .......................................................................................................................... ii
Your Car at a Glance ......................................................................................................................................2
Driver and Passenger Safety .......................................................................................................................5
Proper use and care of your car's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.
Instruments and Controls...........................................................................................................................51
Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.
Comfort and Convenience Features.......................................................................................................113
How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.
Before Driving .............................................................................................................................................161
What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new car, and how to load luggage and other cargo.
Driving...........................................................................................................................................................175
The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.
Maintenance.................................................................................................................................................205
The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your car to the dealer.
Appearance Care.........................................................................................................................................265
Tips on cleaning and protecting your car. Things to look for if your car ever needs body repairs.
Taking Care of the Unexpected...............................................................................................................273
This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.
Technical Information...............................................................................................................................303
ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ......................................................................317
A summary of the warranties covering your new Acura, and how to contact us.
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...............................................................................................................321
How to order manuals and other technical literature.
Index
Service Information Summary
A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.
Main Menu
Owner’s Identification
OWNER
This Owner’s Manual should be considered a
permanent part of the car, and should remain
with the car when it is sold.
ADDRESS
This Owner’s Manual covers all models of
the Acura 3.2 CL. You may find descriptions
of equipment and features that are not on
your particular model.
STREET
CITY
STATE/PROVINCE
ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
V. I. N.
DELIVERY DATE
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
DEALER NAME
DEALER NO.
The information and specifications included
in this publication were in effect at the time
of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and without
incurring any obligation whatsoever.
ADDRESS
STREET
CITY
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE
STATE/PROVINCE
ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN
AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur en
français, veuillez demander à votre
concessionnaire de commander le
numéro de pièce 33S3MC10 .
Main Menu
Introduction
Congratulations ! Your selection of a 2002 Acura 3.2 CL was a wise
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure.
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new Acura is to read
this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your car so you
can refer to it at any time.
As you read this manual, you will
find information that is preceded by
a
symbol. This
information is intended to help you
avoid damage to your Acura, other
property, or the environment.
Several warranties protect your new Acura. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your car according to the schedules given in this manual helps
to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment. When
your car needs maintenance, keep in mind that your Acura dealer’s staff is
specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your Acura. Your
Acura dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answer
any questions and concerns.
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm.
i
Main Menu
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others,
is very important. And operating this
car safely is an important
responsibility.
To help you make informed
decisions about safety, we have
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in
this manual. This information alerts
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with operating or
maintaining your car. You must use
your own good judgement.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
including:
Safety Labels − on the car.
Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol
and one of
three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
instructions.
Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this car correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.
ii
Main Menu
Your Car at a Glance
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.93)
INSTRUMENT PANEL
(P.53)
DRIVING POSITION
MEMORY
(P.95)
CLIMATE CONTROL
SYSTEM
(P.114)
POWER DOOR LOCKS
(P.77)
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.127)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.99)
TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON
(P.82)
2
DIGITAL CLOCK
(P.102)
FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.163)
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.164)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
(P.178)
Main Menu
Your Car at a Glance
WINDSHIELD WIPERS/WASHERS
(P.68, 69)
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS
(P.70)
HORN
(P.64)
TRACTION CONTROL/
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST SYSTEM ON/
OFF SWITCH
(P.190, 193)
MOONROOF SWITCH
(P.101)
CRUISE CONTROL
(P.151)
INSTRUMENT PANEL BRIGHTNESS
(P.67)
TILT
ADJUSTMENT
(P.71)
HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNALS
(P.65, 67)
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER
(P.70)
REMOTE AUDIO CONTROLS
(P.148)
3
Main Menu
4
Main Menu
Driver and Passenger Safety
This section gives you important
information about how to protect
yourself and your passengers. It
shows you how to use seat belts
properly. It explains your Supplemental Restraint System. And it tells
you how to properly restrain infants
and children in your car.
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
Your Car’s Safety Features .............. 7
Seat Belts ........................................ 8
Airbags ............................................ 9
Seats & Seat-Backs ...................... 10
Head Restraints ........................... 10
Door Locks ................................... 10
Pre-Drive Safety Checklist ......... 11
Protecting Adults ............................. 12
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 12
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 13
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 14
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 15
5. Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts ...................................... 15
6. Adjust the Steering Wheel ..... 17
7. Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position ................................. 17
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 18
Additional Safety Precautions .... 19
Protecting Children ......................... 20
All Children Must Be
Restrained ................................ 20
Children Should Sit in the Back
Seat ............................................ 21
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Poses Serious Risks
to Children............................ 21
If You Must Drive with Several
Children .................................... 23
If a Child Requires Close
Attention ................................... 23
Additional Safety Precautions .... 23
General Guidelines for Using
Child Seats ................................ 24
Protecting Infants ........................ 28
Protecting Small Children .......... 32
Protecting Larger Children ........ 35
Using Child Seats with
Tethers...................................... 39
Additional Information About Your
Seat Belts .................................. 40
Seat Belt System Components ... 40
Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 40
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 41
Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 42
Additional Information About
Your Airbags ............................ 43
SRS Components ......................... 43
How Your Front Airbags
Work.......................................... 43
How Your Side Airbags Work.... 45
How the SRS Indicator Light
Works ........................................ 46
How the Side Airbag Cutoff
Indicator Light Works ............ 47
Airbag Service .............................. 48
Additional Safety Precautions .... 48
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 49
Safety Labels .................................... 50
Driver and Passenger Safety
5
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Important Safety Precautions
You’ll find many safety
recommendations throughout this
section, and throughout this manual.
The recommendations on this page
are the ones we consider to be the
most important.
Always Wear Your Seat Belt
A seat belt is your best protection in
all types of collisions. Airbags
supplement seat belts, but airbags
are designed to inflate only in a
moderate to severe frontal collision.
So even though your car is equipped
with airbags, make sure you and
your passengers always wear your
seat belts, and wear them properly.
(See page 15 .)
Restrain All Children
Children are safest when they are
properly restrained in the back seat,
not the front seat. A child who is too
small for a seat belt must be properly
restrained in a child safety seat. (See
page 20 .)
6
Driver and Passenger Safety
Be Aware of Airbag Hazards
While airbags can save lives, they
can cause serious or fatal injuries to
occupants who sit too close to them,
or are not properly restrained.
Infants, young children, and short
adults are at the greatest risk. Be
sure to follow all instructions and
warnings in this manual. (See page
9 .)
Don’t Drink and Drive
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with
every additional drink. So don’t drink
and drive, and don’t let your friends
drink and drive, either.
Control Your Speed
Excessive speed is a major factor in
crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
the higher the speed the greater the
risk, but serious accidents can also
occur at lower speeds. Never drive
faster than is safe for current
conditions, regardless of the
maximum speed posted.
Keep Your Car in Safe Condition
Having a tire blowout or a
mechanical failure can be extremely
hazardous. To reduce the possibility
of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
and perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance. (See page 208 .)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Car’s Safety Features
(8) (10) (1)
(7)
(3) (6) (4)
Your car is equipped with many
features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.
(8)
(2)
(5)
(2)
(6)
(7)
(9)
Some safety features do not require
any action on your part. These
include a strong steel framework
that forms a safety cage around the
passenger compartment; front and
rear crush zones that are designed to
crumple and absorb energy during a
crash; a collapsible steering column;
and seat belt tensioners that
automatically tighten the front seat
belts in the event of a crash.
(1) Safety Cage
(2) Crush Zones
(3) Seats & Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints
(5) Collapsible Steering Column
(6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags
(8) Side Airbags
(9) Seat Belt Tensioners
(10) Door Locks
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
7
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Car’s Safety Features
These safety features are designed
to reduce the severity of injuries in a
crash. However, you and your
passengers can’t take full advantage
of these safety features unless you
remain sitting in a proper position
and always wear your seat belts
properly. In fact, some safety
features can contribute to injuries if
they are not used properly.
Seat Belts
For your safety, and the safety of
your passengers, your car is
equipped with seat belts in all seating
positions.
Your seat belt system also
includes a light on the
instrument panel to remind you and
your passengers to fasten your seat
belts.
Why Wear Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most
effective safety device for adults and
larger children. (Infants and smaller
children must be properly restrained
in child seats.)
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
though your car has airbags.
8
Driver and Passenger Safety
In addition, most states and all
Canadian provinces require you to
wear seat belts.
Not wearing a seat belt properly
increases the chance of serious
injury or death in a crash, even
if you have airbags.
Be sure you and your
passengers always wear seat
belts and wear them properly.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Keep you connected to the vehicle
so you can take advantage of the
vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Help protect you in almost every
type of crash, including frontal,
side, and rear impacts and
rollovers.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Car’s Safety Features
Help keep you from being thrown
against the inside of the car and
against other occupants.
Airbags
Keep you from being thrown out
of the car.
Help keep you in a good position
should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag, and
allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot
completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
What you should do: Always wear
your seat belt, and make sure you
wear it properly.
Your car has a Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) with front
airbags to help protect the heads and
chests of the driver and a front seat
passenger during a moderate to
severe frontal collision.
Your car also has side airbags to help
protect the upper torso of the driver
or a front seat passenger during a
moderate to severe side impact.
The most important things you need
to know about your airbags are:
Airbags do not replace seat belts.
They are designed to supplement
the seat belts.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
9
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Car’s Safety Features
Airbags offer no protection in rear
impacts, rollovers, or minor
frontal or side collisions.
Airbags can pose serious hazards.
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force and
speed. So while airbags help save
lives, they can cause minor injuries,
or more serious or even fatal
injuries if occupants are not
properly restrained or sitting
properly.
What you should do: Always wear
your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel or
dashboard.
10
Driver and Passenger Safety
Seats & Seat-Backs
Your car’s seats are designed to keep
you in a comfortable, upright
position so you can take full
advantage of the protection offered
by seat belts and the energy
absorbing materials in the seats.
How you adjust your seats and seatbacks can also affect your safety. For
example, sitting too close to the
steering wheel or dashboard
increases the risk of you or your
passenger being injured by striking
the inside of the car, or by an
inflating airbag.
Reclining a seat-back too far reduces
the seat belt’s effectiveness and
increases the chance that the seat’s
occupant will slide under the seat
belt in a crash and be seriously
injured.
What you should do: Move the front
seats as far back as possible, and
keep adjustable seat-backs in an
upright position whenever the car is
moving.
Head Restraints
Head restraints can help protect you
from whiplash and other injuries. For
maximum protection, the back of
your head should rest against the
center of the head restraint.
Door Locks
Keeping your doors locked reduces
the chance of being thrown out of
the car during a crash. It also helps
prevent occupants from accidentally
opening a door and falling out, and
outsiders from unexpectedly opening
your doors.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Your Car’s Safety Features
Pre-Drive Safety Checklist
To make sure you and your
passengers get the maximum
protection from your car’s safety
features, check the following each
time before you drive away:
All adults, and children who have
outgrown child safety seats, are
wearing their seat belts and
wearing them properly (see page
15 ).
Any infant or small child is
properly restrained in a child seat
in the back seat (see page 20 ).
Front seat occupants are sitting
upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel and
dashboard (see page 13 ).
Seat-backs are upright (see page
14 ).
Head restraints are properly
adjusted (see page 15 ).
The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
can maximize your safety.
Remember, however, that no safety
system can prevent all injuries or
deaths that can occur in severe
crashes, even when seat belts are
properly worn and the airbags deploy.
Both doors are closed and locked
(see page 12 ).
All cargo is properly stored or
secured (see page 171 ).
Driver and Passenger Safety
11
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults
Introduction
The following pages provide
instructions on how to properly
protect the driver and other adult
occupants.
These instructions also apply to
children who have outgrown child
seats and are large enough to wear
lap/shoulder belts. (See page 35 for
important additional guidelines on
how to properly protect larger
children.)
1.Close and Lock the Doors
After everyone has entered the car,
be sure the doors are closed and
locked.
See page 77 for how to lock the
doors.
Your car has a door monitor light on
the instrument panel to indicate
when a specific door is not tightly
closed.
For safety, locking the doors reduces
the chance that a passenger,
especially a child, will open a door
while the car is moving and
accidentally fall out. It also reduces
the chance of someone being thrown
out of the car during a crash.
12
Driver and Passenger Safety
For security, locked doors can
prevent an outsider from
unexpectedly opening a door when
you come to a stop.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults
2.Adjust the Front Seats
Any driver who sits too close to the
steering wheel is at risk of being
seriously injured or killed by striking
the steering wheel or from being
struck by an inflating front airbag
during a crash.
To reduce the chance of injury, wear
your seat belt properly, sit upright
with your back against the seat, and
move the seat away from the
steering wheel to the farthest
distance that allows you to maintain
full control of the car.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that drivers
adjust the seat so the center of the
chest is at least 10 inches (25 cm)
away from the center of the steering
wheel. Also make sure your front
seat passenger moves the seat as far
to the rear as possible.
Sitting too close to a front
airbag can result in serious
injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the
front airbags as possible.
Most shorter drivers can get far
enough away from the steering
wheel and still reach the pedals.
However, if you are concerned about
sitting too close, we recommend that
you investigate whether some type
of adaptive equipment may help.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
rock it back and forth to make sure
the seat is locked in position.
See page 86 for how to adjust the
front seats.
Driver and Passenger Safety
13
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults
3.Adjust the Seat-Backs
Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
comfortable, upright position,
leaving ample space between your
chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel. If you
sit too close to the steering wheel,
you could be injured if the front
airbag inflates.
14
Driver and Passenger Safety
A front passenger should also adjust
the seat-back to an upright position,
but as far from the dashboard as
possible. A passenger who sits too
close to the dashboard could be
injured if the front airbag inflates.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer
rests against the occupant’s chest
reduces the protective capability of
the belt. It also increases the chance
of sliding under the belt in a crash
and being seriously injured. The
farther a seat-back is reclined, the
greater the risk of injury.
Reclining the seat-back too far
can result in serious injury or
death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an
upright position and sit well
back in the seat.
See page 87 for how to adjust seatbacks.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults
4.Adjust the Head Restraints
Improperly positioning head
restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are
in place and positioned properly
before driving.
Before driving, make sure everyone
with an adjustable head restraint has
properly positioned the head
restraint. The restraint should be
positioned so the back of the
occupant’s head rests against the
center of the restraint. A taller
person should adjust the restraint as
high as possible.
5.Fasten and Position the Seat
Belts
Insert the latch plate into the buckle,
then tug on the belt to make sure the
belt is securely latched. Also check
that the belt is not twisted, because a
twisted belt can cause serious
injuries in a crash.
Properly adjusted head restraints
will help protect occupants from
whiplash and other crash injuries.
See page 90 for how to adjust the
head restraints.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
15
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults
If necessary, pull up on the belt again
to remove any slack from the
shoulder part, then check that the
belt rests across the center of your
chest and over your shoulder. This
spreads the forces of a crash over
the strongest bones in your upper
body.
Never place the shoulder portion of a
lap/shoulder belt under your arm or
behind your back. This could cause
very serious injuries in a crash.
If a seat belt does not seem to work
as it should, it may not protect the
occupant in a crash. No one should
sit in a seat with an inoperative seat
belt. Anyone using a seat belt that is
Position the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of
the belt so the lap part fits snugly.
This lets your strong pelvic bones
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
16
Driver and Passenger Safety
Improperly positioning the seat
belts can cause serious injury
or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are
properly positioned before
driving.
not working properly can be
seriously injured or killed. Have your
Acura dealer check the belt as soon
as possible.
See page 40 for additional
information about your seat belt
system and how to take care of your
belts.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults
6.Adjust the Steering Wheel
Adjust the steering wheel, if needed,
so that the wheel points toward your
chest, not toward your face.
Pointing the steering wheel toward
your chest provides optimal
protection from the airbag.
7.Maintain a Proper Sitting
Position
After all occupants have adjusted
their seats and put on seat belts, it is
very important that they continue to
sit upright, well back in their seats,
with their feet on the floor, until the
car is parked and the engine is off.
Sitting improperly can increase the
chance of injury during a crash. For
example, if an occupant slouches,
lies down, turns sideways, sits
forward, leans forward or sideways,
or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is
greatly increased.
In addition, an occupant who is out of
position in the front seat can be
seriously or fatally injured by
striking interior parts of the car, or
by being struck by an inflating front
airbag. Being struck by an inflating
side airbag can result in possibly
serious injuries.
Sitting improperly or out of
position can result in serious
injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in
the seat, with your feet on the
floor.
See page 71 for how to adjust the
steering wheel.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
17
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults
Remember, to get the best
protection from your car’s airbags
and other safety features, you must
sit properly and wear your seat belt
properly.
Advice for Pregnant Women
Pregnant women should also sit
upright and as far back as possible
from the steering wheel or
dashboard. This will reduce the risk
of injuries to both the mother and
her unborn child that can be caused
by a crash or an inflating airbag.
Each time you have a check-up, ask
your doctor if it’s okay for you to
drive.
Because protecting the mother is the
best way to protect her unborn child,
a pregnant woman should always
wear a seat belt whenever she drives
or rides in a car.
Remember to keep the lap portion of
the belt as low as possible across
your hips.
18
Driver and Passenger Safety
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Adults
Additional Safety Precautions
Two people should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
Do not put any accessories on seat
belts. Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt can
severely compromise the
protective capability of the seat
belt and increase the chance of
serious injury in a crash.
Do not place hard or sharp objects
between yourself and a front
airbag. Carrying hard or sharp
objects on your lap, or driving with
a pipe or other sharp object in
your mouth, can result in injuries
if your front airbag inflates.
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers. Any object
attached to or placed on the covers
marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’ in the
center of the steering wheel and
on top of the dashboard could
interfere with the proper operation
of the airbags. Or, if the airbags
inflate, the objects could be
propelled inside the car and hurt
someone.
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a door. If a side airbag
inflates, a cup holder or other hard
object attached on or near the
door could be propelled inside the
car and hurt someone.
Keep your hands and arms away
from the airbag covers. If your
hands or arms are close to the
airbag cover in the center of the
steering wheel or on top of the
dashboard, they could be injured if
the front airbags inflate.
Driver and Passenger Safety
19
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
Children who are unrestrained
or improperly restrained can be
seriously injured or killed in a
crash.
Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. A
larger child should be properly
restrained with a seat belt.
Children depend on adults to protect
them. However, despite their best
intentions, many parents and other
adults may not know how to properly
protect young passengers.
All Children Must Be Restrained
Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because
they are either unrestrained or not
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle
accidents are the number one cause
of death of children ages 12 and
under.
To reduce the number of child
deaths and injuries, every state and
Canadian province requires that
infants and children be restrained
whenever they ride in a vehicle.
Any child who is too small to wear a
seat belt should be properly
restrained in a child seat. (See page
24 .)
So if you have children, or if you ever
need to drive with a grandchild or
other children in your car, be sure to
read this section.
20
Driver and Passenger Safety
A larger child should always be
restrained with a seat belt. (See page
35 .)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
Children Should Sit in the Back
Seat
According to accident statistics,
children of all ages and sizes are
safer when they are restrained in the
back seat, not the front seat. The
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly
restrained in the back seat.
In the back seat, children are less
likely to be injured by striking hard
interior parts during a collision or
hard braking. Also, children cannot
be injured by an inflating airbag
when they ride in the back.
The Passenger’s Front Airbag
Poses Serious Risks to Children
Front airbags have been designed to
help protect adults in a moderate to
severe frontal collision. To do this,
the passenger’s front airbag is quite
large, and it inflates with tremendous
speed.
Infants
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag. If
the airbag inflates, it can hit the back
of the child seat with enough force
to kill or very seriously injure an
infant.
Small Children
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to kill or
very seriously injure a small child.
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown child
seats are also at risk of being injured
or killed by an inflating passenger’s
front airbag. Whenever possible,
larger children should sit in the back
seat, properly restrained with a seat
belt. (See page 35 for important
information about protecting larger
children.)
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
21
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
U.S. Models
Canadian Models
To remind you of the passenger’s
front airbag hazards, and that
children must be properly restrained
in the back seat, your car has
warning labels on the dashboard and
on the driver’s and front passenger’s
visors. Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
To remind you of the front airbag
hazards, your car has warning labels
on the driver’s and front passenger’s
visors. Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
22
Driver and Passenger Safety
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
If You Must Drive with Several
Children
Your car has two seating positions in
the back seat where children can be
properly restrained.
If you ever have to carry more than
two children in your car:
Place the largest child in the front
seat, provided the child is large
enough to wear a seat belt
properly (see page 35 ).
Move the vehicle seat as far to the
rear as possible (see page 13 ).
Have the child sit upright and well
back in the seat (see page 17 ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly
positioned and secured (see page
15 ).
If a Child Requires Close
Attention
Many parents say they prefer to put
an infant or small child in the front
passenger seat so they can watch the
child, or because the child requires
attention.
Placing a child in the front seat
exposes the child to hazards from
the passenger’s front airbag, and
paying close attention to a child
distracts the driver from the
important tasks of driving, placing
both of you at risk.
If a child requires physical attention
or frequent visual contact, we
strongly recommend that another
adult ride with the child in the back
seat. The back seat is far safer for a
child than the front.
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not leave children alone in your
vehicle. Leaving children without
adult supervision is illegal in most
states and Canadian provinces,
and can be very hazardous. For
example, infants and small
children left in a vehicle on a hot
day can die from heatstroke. And
children left alone with the key in
the ignition can accidentally set
the vehicle in motion, possibly
injuring themselves or others.
Lock both doors and the trunk
when your car is not in use.
Children who play in cars can
accidentally get trapped inside the
trunk. Teach your children not to
play in or around cars. Know how
to operate the emergency trunk
opener (US models only) and
decide if your children should be
shown how to use this feature (see
page 84 ).
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
23
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
Keep car keys and remote
transmitters out of the reach of
children. Even very young
children learn how to unlock
vehicle doors, turn on the ignition,
and open the trunk, which can
lead to accidental injury or death.
General Guidelines for Using
Child Seats
The following pages give general
guidelines for selecting and installing
child seats for infants and small
children.
Selecting a Child Seat
To provide proper protection, a child
seat should meet three
requirements:
1. The child seat should meet safety
standards. The child seat should
meet Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard 213 (FMVSS 213)
or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard 213 (CMVSS 213). Look
for the manufacturer’s statement
of compliance on the box and seat.
24
Driver and Passenger Safety
2. The child seat should be of the
proper type and size to fit the child.
Infants: Children up to about one
year old should be restrained in a
rear-facing, reclining child seat. Only
a rear-facing seat provides the
proper support to protect an infant’s
head, neck, and back. See page
28 for additional information on
protecting infants.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
3. The child seat should fit the
vehicle seating position (or
positions) where it will be used.
Due to variations in the design of
child seats, vehicle seats, and seat
belts, all child seats will not fit all
vehicle seating positions.
Small Children: A child who is too
large for a rear-facing child seat, and
who can sit up without support,
should be restrained in a forwardfacing child seat. See page 32 for
additional information on protecting
small children.
Before purchasing a child seat, we
recommend that parents test the
child seat in the specific vehicle
seating position (or positions) where
they intend to use the seat. If a
previously purchased child seat does
not fit, you may need to buy a
different one that will fit.
However, Acura is confident that one
or more child seat models can fit and
be properly installed in all
recommended seating positions in
your car.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
25
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
Placing a Child Seat
This page briefly summarizes Acura’s
recommendations on where to place
rear-facing and forward-facing child
seats in your car.
Airbags Pose Serious
Risks to Children
The passenger’s front airbag
inflates with enough force to kill
or seriously injure an infant in a
rear-facing child seat.
A small child in a forward-facing
child seat is also at risk. If the
vehicle seat is too far forward,
or the child’s head is thrown
forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can kill or
seriously injure the child.
Front Passenger’s Seat
Infants: Never in the front seat, due
to the front airbag hazard.
Small children: Not recommended,
due to the front airbag hazard. If a
small child must ride in front,
move the vehicle seat to the rearmost position and secure a frontfacing child seat with the seat belt
(see page 33 ).
Back Seats
Infants: Recommended positions.
Secure a rear-facing child seat
with the seat belt (see page 29 ).
Small children: Recommended
If a small child must ride in the
front, follow the instructions
provided in this section.
26
Driver and Passenger Safety
positions. Secure a front-facing
child seat with the seat belt (see
page 33 ).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
Installing a Child Seat
After selecting a proper child seat,
and a good position to install the seat,
there are three main steps in
installing the seat:
1. Secure the child seat to the car
with a seat belt. All child seats
must be secured to the car with
the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.
A child whose seat is not properly
secured to the car can be
endangered in a crash. See pages
29 and 33 for instructions on how
to secure child seats in this car.
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured. After installing a child
seat, push and pull the seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure.
To provide security during normal
driving maneuvers as well as during
a collision, we recommend that
parents secure a child seat as firmly
as possible.
However, a child seat does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ In some vehicles
or seating positions, it may be
difficult to install a child seat so that
it does not move at all. Some side-toside or back-and-forth movement can
be expected and should not reduce
the child seat’s effectiveness.
If the child seat is not secure, try
installing it in a different seating
position, or use a different style of
child seat that can be firmly secured
in the desired seating position.
3. Secure the child in the child seat.
Make sure the child is properly
strapped in the child seat
according to the child seat maker’s
instructions. A child who is not
properly secured in a child seat
can be thrown out of the seat in a
crash and be seriously injured.
Storing a Child Seat
When you are not using a child seat,
either remove it and store it in a safe
place, or make sure it is properly
secured. An unsecured child seat can
be thrown around the car during a
crash or sudden stop and injure
someone.
Driver and Passenger Safety
27
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
Protecting Infants
Rear-Facing Child Seat Placement
Placing a rear-facing child seat
in the front seat can result in
serious injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
Always place a rear-facing child
seat in the back seat, not the
front.
Child Seat Type
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back. Infants up to about
one year of age must be restrained in
a rear-facing child seat.
Two types of seats may be used: a
seat designed exclusively for infants,
or a convertible seat used in the rearfacing, reclining mode.
28
Driver and Passenger Safety
We recommend that an infant be
restrained in a rear-facing child seat
until the infant reaches the seat
maker’s weight or height limit and is
able to sit up without support.
In this car, a rear-facing child seat
can be placed in any seating position
in the back seat, but not in the front
seat.
Never put a rear-facing child seat in
the front seat. If the passenger’s
front airbag inflates, it can hit the
back of the child seat with enough
force to kill or seriously injure an
infant. If an infant must be closely
watched, we recommend that
another adult sit in the back seat
with the baby.
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in
a forward-facing position. If placed
facing forward, an infant could be
very seriously injured during a
frontal collision.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation
The lap/shoulder belts in the back
seats have a locking mechanism that
must be activated to secure a child
seat.
The following pages provide
instructions and tips on how to
secure a rear-facing child seat with
this type of seat belt.
1. With the child seat in the desired
back seating position, route the
belt through the child seat
according to the seat maker’s
instructions, then insert the latch
plate into the buckle.
2. To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor (you might hear a
clicking noise as the belt retracts).
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked and
you will need to repeat these steps.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
29
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
To deactivate the locking
mechanism and remove a child seat,
unlatch the buckle, unroute the seat
belt, and let the belt fully retract.
4. After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure.
To remove slack, it may help to
put weight on the child seat, or
push on the back of the seat, while
pulling up on the belt.
30
Driver and Passenger Safety
5. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
Rear-Facing Child Seat Installation
Tips
For proper protection, an infant must
ride in a reclined, or semi-reclined
position. To determine the proper
reclining angle, check with the baby’s
doctor or follow the seat maker’s
recommendations.
When properly installed, a rearfacing child seat may prevent the
driver or a front-seat passenger from
moving the seat as far back as
recommended (see page 13 ). Or it
may prevent them from locking the
seat-back in the desired upright
position (see page 14 ).
In either case, we recommend that
you place the child seat directly
behind the front passenger seat,
move the front seat as far forward as
needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or
you may wish to get a smaller child
seat that allows you to safely carry a
front passenger.
Additional Precautions for Infants
Never hold an infant on your lap.
If you are not wearing a seat belt
in a crash, you could be thrown
forward into the dashboard and
crush the infant.
If you are wearing a seat belt, the
infant can be torn from your arms
during a crash. For example, if
your car crashes into a parked
vehicle at 30 mph (48 km/h), a
20-lb (9 kg) infant will become a
600-lb (275 kg) force, and you will
not be able to hold on.
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and an infant. During a crash, the
belt could press deep into the
infant and cause very serious
injuries.
To achieve the desired reclining
angle, it may help to put a rolled up
towel under the toe of the child seat,
as shown.
Driver and Passenger Safety
31
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
Protecting Small Children
We also recommend that a small
child stay in the child seat as long as
possible, until the child reaches the
weight or height limit for the seat.
Child Seat Placement
In this car, the best place to install a
forward-facing child seat is in one of
the seating positions in the back seat.
Placing a forward-facing child seat in
the front seat of a vehicle equipped
with a passenger’s front airbag can
be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is
Child Seat Type
A child who can sit up without
support, and who fits within the child
seat maker’s weight and height
limits, should be restrained in a
forward-facing, upright child seat.
Of the different seats available, we
recommend those that have a fivepoint harness system as shown.
32
Driver and Passenger Safety
too far forward, or the child’s head is
thrown forward during a collision, an
inflating front airbag can strike the
child with enough force to cause
very serious or fatal injuries. If a
small child must be closely watched,
we recommend that another adult sit
in the back seat with the child.
Improperly placing a forwardfacing child seat in the front
seat can result in serious injury
or death if the front airbags
inflate.
If you must place a forwardfacing child seat in front, move
the vehicle seat as far back as
possible and properly restrain
the child.
If it is necessary to put a forwardfacing child seat in the front, move
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as
possible, be sure the child seat is
firmly secured to the car, and the
child is properly strapped in the seat.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
Child Seat Installation
The lap/shoulder belts in the back
and front passenger seating positions
have a locking mechanism that must
be activated to secure a child seat.
The following pages provide
instructions on how to secure a
forward-facing child seat with this
type of seat belt.
1. With the child seat in the desired
seating position, route the belt
through the child seat according
to the seat maker’s instructions,
then insert the latch plate into the
buckle.
2. To activate the lockable retractor,
slowly pull the shoulder part of the
belt all the way out until it stops,
then let the belt feed back into the
retractor (you might hear a
clicking noise as the belt retracts).
3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
it. If the belt is locked, you will not
be able to pull it out. If you can pull
the belt out, it is not locked and
you will need to repeat these steps.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
33
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
To deactivate the locking
mechanism in order to remove a
child seat, unlatch the buckle,
unroute the seat belt, and let the belt
fully retract.
4. After confirming that the belt is
locked, grab the shoulder part of
the belt near the buckle and pull
up to remove any slack from the
lap part of the belt. Remember, if
the lap part of the belt is not tight,
the child seat will not be secure. It
may help to put weight on the
child seat, or push on the back of
the seat, while pulling up on the
belt.
34
Driver and Passenger Safety
5. Push and pull the child seat
forward and from side to side to
verify that it is secure enough to
stay upright during normal driving
maneuvers. If the child seat is not
secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
Additional Precautions for Small
Children
Never hold a small child on your
lap. If you are not wearing a seat
belt in a crash, you could be
thrown forward into the
dashboard and crush the child.
If you are wearing a seat belt, the
child can be torn from your arms
during a crash. For example, if
your car crashes into a parked
vehicle at 30 mph (48 km/h), a
30-lb (14 kg) child will become a
900-lb (410 kg) force, and you will
not be able to hold on.
Never put a seat belt over yourself
and a child. During a crash, the
belt could press deep into the child
and cause very serious injuries.
Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the
recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the
child should sit in the back seat and
wear a lap/shoulder belt.
If a child is too short for the shoulder
part of the belt to properly fit, we
recommend that the child use a
booster seat until the child is tall
enough to use the seat belt without a
booster.
Allowing a larger child to sit
improperly in the front seat can
result in injury or death if the
passenger’s front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must sit in front,
make sure the child moves the
seat as far back as possible
and wears the seat belt properly.
The following pages give
instructions on how to check proper
seat belt fit, what kind of booster
seat to use if one is needed, and
important precautions for a child
who must sit in the front seat.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
35
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
Checking Seat Belt Fit
However, if the belt touches or
crosses the child’s neck, the child
needs to use a booster seat.
Do not let a child wear a seat belt
across the neck. This could result in
serious neck injuries during a crash.
Do not let a child put the shoulder
part of a seat belt behind the back or
under the arm. This could cause
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt
properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt. Follow the
instructions on page 15 . Then check
how the belt fits.
If the shoulder part of the belt rests
over the child’s collarbone and
against the center of the chest, as
shown, the child is large enough to
wear the seat belt.
36
Driver and Passenger Safety
very serious injuries during a crash.
It also increases the chance that the
child will slide under the belt in a
crash and be injured.
Do not put any accessories on a seat
belt. Devices intended to improve
occupant comfort or reposition the
shoulder part of a seat belt, severely
compromise the protective capability
of the seat belt and increase the
chance of serious injury in a crash.
Two children should never use the
same seat belt. If they do, they could
be very seriously injured in a crash.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
Using a Booster Seat
A child may continue using a booster
seat until the tops of the ears are
even with the top of the seat-back. A
child of this height should be tall
enough to use the lap/shoulder belt
without a booster.
When Can a Larger Child Sit in Front
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport
Canada recommend that all children
ages 12 and under be properly
restrained in the back seat.
The back seat is the safest place for
a child of any age or size.
If a child needs a booster seat, we
recommend choosing a style that
allows the child to use the lap/
shoulder belt directly, without a
shield, as shown.
Whichever style you select, follow
the booster seat maker’s instructions.
In addition, the passenger’s front
airbag poses serious risks to children.
If the seat is too far forward, or the
child’s head is thrown forward
during a collision, or the child is
unrestrained or out of position, an
inflating front airbag can kill or
seriously injure the child.
The side airbag also poses risks. If
any part of a larger child’s body is in
the path of a deploying airbag, the
child could receive possibly serious
injuries.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
37
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
Of course, children vary widely. And
while age may be one indicator of
when a child can safely ride in the
front, there are other important
factors you should consider.
Physical Size
Physically, a child must be large
enough for the lap/shoulder belt to
properly fit over the hips, chest, and
shoulder (see pages 15 and 35 ). If
the seat belt does not fit properly,
the child should not sit in the front.
Maturity
To safely ride in front, a child must
be able to follow the rules, including
sitting properly and wearing the seat
belt properly throughout a ride.
If you decide that a child can safely
ride up front, be sure to:
Carefully read the owner’s manual
and make sure you understand all
seat belt instructions and all safety
information.
Move the vehicle seat to the rearmost position.
Have the child sit up straight, back
against the seat, and feet on or
near the floor.
Check that the child’s seat belt is
properly positioned and secured.
Supervise the child. Even mature
children sometimes need to be
reminded to fasten the seat belts
or sit properly.
38
Driver and Passenger Safety
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Protecting Children
Using Child Seats with Tethers
COVER
Your car has two tether anchorage
points under the rear window for
securing a tether-style child seat to
the car.
The tether anchorage points are
located under plastic covers. Pivot
the cover backward to access the
anchorage point.
Since a tether can provide additional
security, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available. (Tethers are required in
Canada.)
Attach the tether strap hook to the
tether anchorage point as shown in
the illustration, then tighten the
strap according to the child seat
maker’s instructions. Make sure the
strap is not twisted.
Driver and Passenger Safety
39
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components
Your seat belt system includes lap/
shoulder belts in all four seating
positions. The front seat belts are
also equipped with automatic seat
belt tensioners.
The seat belt system also
includes a light on the
instrument panel to remind you and
your passengers to fasten your belts.
If the driver’s seat belt is not
fastened before the ignition is turned
ON (II), the light will come on and a
beeper will also sound. The beeper
will stop after a few seconds, but the
light will stay on until the driver’s
seat belt is fastened.
Lap/Shoulder Belt
Guide the belt across your body to
the door pillar. After exiting the car,
be sure the belt is out of the way and
will not get closed in the door.
This seat belt has a single belt that
goes over your shoulder, across your
chest and across your hips.
To fasten the belt, insert the latch
plate into the buckle, then tug on the
belt to make sure the buckle is
latched.
40
Driver and Passenger Safety
To unlock the belt, push the red
PRESS button on the buckle.
All seat belts have an emergency
locking retractor. In normal driving,
the retractor lets you move freely in
your seat while it keeps some
tension on the belt. During a collision
or sudden stop, the retractor
automatically locks the belt to help
restrain your body.
The seat belts in all seating positions
except the driver’s have an additional
locking mechanism that must be
activated to secure a child seat. (See
pages 29 and 33 for instructions on
how to secure child seats with this
type of seat belt.)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
If the shoulder part of the belt is
pulled all the way out, the locking
mechanism will activate. The belt
will retract, but it will not allow the
passenger to move freely.
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
To deactivate the locking
mechanism, unlatch the buckle and
let the seat belt fully retract. To
refasten the belt, pull it out only as
far as needed.
See page 15 for instructions on how
to wear the lap/shoulder belt
properly.
might not cause the airbags to
deploy. In this case, the airbags
would not be needed but the
additional seat belt tension can be
helpful.
The tensioners will be activated in a
collision severe enough to cause the
front airbags to inflate.
When the tensioners are activated,
the seat belts will remain tight until
they are unbuckled in the normal
way.
For added protection, the front seat
belts are equipped with automatic
seat belt tensioners. When activated,
the tensioners immediately tighten
the belts to help hold the driver and
a front passenger in place.
The SRS indicator light will
come on if there is a
problem with your automatic seat
belt tensioners (see page 46 ).
The tensioners are designed to
activate primarily in frontal collisions.
The tensioners are independent of
the airbag system, so they can be
activated during a collision that
Driver and Passenger Safety
41
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt Maintenance
For safety, you should check the
condition of your seat belts regularly.
Pull each belt out fully and look for
frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and
that the lap/shoulder belts retract
easily. Any belt not in good condition
or not working properly will not
provide good protection and should
be replaced as soon as possible.
U.S. Models
Acura provides a lifetime warranty
on seat belts. Acura will repair or
replace any seat belt component
that fails to function properly
during normal use. Please see
your Acura Warranty Information
booklet for details.
42
Driver and Passenger Safety
Not checking or maintaining
seat belts can result in serious
injury or death if the seat belts
do not work properly when
needed.
Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
it must be replaced by the dealer. A
belt that has been worn during a
crash may not provide the same level
of protection in a subsequent crash.
The dealer should also inspect the
anchors for damage and replace
them if needed.
Automatic seat belt tensioners that
deployed during a crash must be
replaced.
For information on how to clean your
seat belts, see page 269 .
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
SRS Components
Your Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS) includes:
Two front airbags. The driver’s
airbag is stored in the center of
the steering wheel; the front
passenger’s airbag is stored in the
dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
AIRBAG.’’
An indicator light on the
instrument panel that alerts you to
a possible problem with the
system (see page 46 ).
How Your Front Airbags Work
Emergency backup power in case
your car’s electrical system is
disconnected in a crash.
Automatic seat belt tensioners
(see page 41 ).
Sensors that can detect a
moderate to severe frontal
collision.
A sophisticated electronic system
that continually monitors and
records information about the
sensors, the control unit, the
airbag activators, and driver and
passenger seat belt use when the
ignition is ON (II).
If you ever have a moderate to
severe frontal collision, the sensors
will detect the vehicle’s rapid
deceleration. If the rate of
deceleration is high enough, the
control unit will instantly inflate the
front airbags.
CONTINUED
Driver and Passenger Safety
43
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
After a crash, you may see what
looks like smoke. This is actually
powder from the airbag’s surface.
Although the powder is not harmful,
people with respiratory problems
may experience some temporary
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of
the car as soon as it is safe to do so.
During a frontal crash, your seat
belts help restrain your lower body
and torso. Your airbag provides a
cushion to help restrain and protect
your head and chest.
Since both airbags use the same
sensors, both airbags normally
inflate at the same time. However, it
is possible for only one airbag to
inflate.
This can occur when the severity of
a collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
such cases, the seat belt will provide
sufficient protection, and the
supplemental protection offered by
the airbag would be minimal.
U.S. Owners
After inflating, the front airbags
immediately deflate, so they won’t
interfere with the driver’s visibility,
or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
The total time for inflation and
deflation is approximately one-tenth
of a second, so fast that most
occupants are not aware that the
airbags deployed until they see them
lying in their laps.
44
Driver and Passenger Safety
For additional information on how
your airbags work, see the booklet
titled SRS: What You Need to Know
About Airbags that came with your
owner’s manual.
Canadian Owners
For additional information on how
your airbags work, ask your dealer
for a copy of the booklet titled SRS:
What You Need to Know About Airbags.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
To get the best protection from the
side airbags, front seat occupants
should wear their seat belts and sit
upright and well back in their seats.
How Your Side Airbags Work
Your car is equipped with side
airbags for the driver and a front
seat passenger. The airbags are
stored in the outer edges of the front
seat-backs, and both are marked
‘‘SIDE AIRBAG.’’
If you ever have a moderate to
severe side impact, the sensors will
detect rapid deceleration and signal
the control unit to instantly inflate
either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag.
Only one airbag will deploy during a
side impact. If the impact is on the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s
side airbag will deploy even if there
is no passenger.
Driver and Passenger Safety
45
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How the SRS Indicator Light
Works
The purpose of the SRS
indicator light is to alert
you to a potential problem with your
front airbags. This light will also
alert you to a potential problem with
your automatic seat belt tensioners
(page 41 ); or your side airbags or
passenger’s side airbag automatic
cutoff system (page 47 ).
When you turn the ignition ON (II),
this indicator will light briefly then
go out. This tells you that the system
is working properly.
46
Driver and Passenger Safety
If the light comes on at any other
time, or does not come on at all, you
should have the system checked by
your dealer. For example:
If the SRS indicator light does not
come on after you turn the ignition
ON (II).
If the light stays on after the
engine starts.
If the light comes on or flashes on
and off while you drive.
If you see any of these indications,
your front or side airbags may not
deploy, your passenger’s side airbag
automatic cutoff system may not
work properly, or your seat belt
tensioners may not work when you
need them. See your Acura dealer as
soon as possible.
Ignoring the SRS indicator light
can result in serious injury or
death if the airbags, cutoff
system, or tensioners do not
work properly.
Have your vehicle checked by a
dealer as soon as possible if
the SRS light alerts you to a
potential problem.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
How the Side Airbag Cutoff
Indicator Light Works
This light alerts you that
the passenger’s side airbag
has been automatically shut off.
If does not mean there is a problem
with your side airbags. It means that
the side airbag cutoff system has
activated to prevent the side airbag
from deploying.
To reduce the risk of injury from an
inflating side airbag, your car has an
automatic cutoff system for the
passenger’s side airbag.
If a small-statured adult leans
sideways, or larger adult slouches
and leans sideways into the
deployment path of the side airbag,
the system may also shut off the side
airbag.
If the side airbag cutoff indicator
light comes on, you should have the
passenger sit upright. Once the
passenger is out of the deployment
path of the side airbag, the system
will turn the airbag back on and the
light will go out.
A front seat passenger should not
use a cushion or other object as a
backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
When you turn the ignition ON (II),
the indicator should light briefly and
go out (see page 56 ). If it doesn’t
light, stays on, or comes on while
driving without a passenger in the
front seat, have the system checked.
Although Acura does not encourage
children to ride in the front seat, this
system is designed to shut off the
side airbag if a child leans sideways
and the child’s head is in the side
airbag deployment path.
Driver and Passenger Safety
47
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag Service
Your front and side airbag systems
are virtually maintenance-free, and
there are no parts you can safely
service. However, you must have
your car serviced if:
Your airbags ever inflate. Any
airbag that has deployed must be
replaced along with the control
unit, automatic seat belt
tensioners and other related parts.
Do not try to remove or replace
any airbag by yourself. This must
be done by an Acura dealer or a
knowledgeable body shop.
The SRS indicator light alerts you
to a problem. Take your car to an
authorized Acura dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, the airbags might not
inflate when you need them.
48
Driver and Passenger Safety
Additional Safety Precautions
Do not attempt to deactivate your
airbags. Together, airbags and
seat belts provide the best
protection.
Do not tamper with airbag
components or wiring for any
reason. Tampering could cause
the airbags to deploy, possibly
causing very serious injury.
Do not expose the front seat-backs
to water. If rain or spilled water
soaks into a seat-back, it can
prevent the side airbag system
from working properly.
Do not cover or replace front seatback covers without consulting an
Acura dealer. Improperly
replacing or covering front seatback covers can prevent your side
airbags from inflating during a
collision.
See page 170 for further information
and precautions relating to your
airbags.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Your car’s exhaust contains carbon
monoxide gas. You should have no
problem with carbon monoxide
entering the car in normal driving if
you maintain your car properly.
Have the exhaust system inspected
for leaks whenever:
The car is raised for an oil change.
You notice a change in the sound
of the exhaust.
The car was in an accident that
may have damaged the underside.
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause
unconsciousness and even kill
you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or
activities that expose you to
carbon monoxide.
High levels of carbon monoxide can
collect rapidly in enclosed areas,
such as a garage. Do not run the
engine with the garage door closed.
Even with the door open, run the
engine only long enough to move the
vehicle out of the garage.
With the trunk lid open, air flow can
pull exhaust gas into your car’s
interior and create a hazardous
condition. If you must drive with the
trunk lid open, open all the windows
and set the climate control system as
shown below.
If you must sit in your parked car,
even in an unconfined area, with the
engine running, adjust the climate
control system as follows:
1. Select the Fresh Air mode.
mode.
2. Select the
3. Set the fan speed to high.
4. Set the temperature control to a
comfortable setting.
Driver and Passenger Safety
49
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations
shown. They warn you of potential
hazards that could cause serious
injury. Read these labels carefully.
SUN VISOR
U.S. models
Canadian models
If a label comes off or becomes hard
to read, contact your Acura dealer
for a replacement.
DASHBOARD
U.S. models only
RADIATOR CAP
HOOD
50
Driver and Passenger Safety
Main Menu
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about
the controls and displays that
contribute to the daily operation of
your Acura. All the essential controls
are within easy reach.
Control Locations ............................ 52
Indicator Lights................................ 53
Gauges .............................................. 60
Speedometer ................................ 60
Tachometer .................................. 60
Odometer ...................................... 61
Trip Meter .................................... 61
Outside Temperature
Indicator .................................... 62
Temperature Gauge .................... 62
Fuel Gauge ................................... 62
Maintenance Required
Indicator .................................... 63
Controls Near the Steering
Wheel ........................................ 64
Headlights .................................... 65
Automatic Lighting Off
Feature ...................................... 66
Daytime Running Lights............. 67
Instrument Panel Brightness ..... 67
Turn Signals ................................. 67
Windshield Wipers ...................... 68
Windshield Washers ................... 69
Hazard Warning........................... 70
Rear Window Defogger .............. 70
Steering Wheel Adjustment ....... 71
Keys and Locks ................................ 73
Keys............................................... 73
Immobilizer System..................... 74
Ignition Switch ............................. 75
Power Door Locks ....................... 77
Remote Transmitter .................... 78
Trunk ............................................ 82
Emergency Trunk Opener ......... 84
Glove Box ..................................... 85
Rear Console Compartment ....... 85
Seat Adjustments ............................. 86
Driver’s Seat Adjustments .......... 86
Driver’s Lumbar Support ............ 88
Front Passenger’s Seat
Adjustments ............................. 88
Rear Seat Access ......................... 89
Head Restraints ........................... 90
Armrest ............................................. 91
Mirrors .............................................. 93
Adjusting the Power Mirrors ..... 93
Driving Position Memory
System ........................................... 95
Seat Heaters ..................................... 98
Power Windows ............................... 99
Moonroof ........................................ 101
Parking Brake ................................ 102
Digital Clock ................................... 102
Sunglasses Holder ......................... 103
Beverage Holder ............................ 104
Console Compartment .................. 105
Coin Box ......................................... 105
Console Pocket .............................. 106
Storage Tray ................................... 107
Coat Hook ....................................... 107
Sun Visor......................................... 108
Vanity Mirror ................................. 108
Accessory Power Sockets............. 109
Interior Lights ................................ 110
Instruments and Controls
51
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Control Locations
DRIVING POSITION MEMORY
(P.95)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.93)
DIGITAL CLOCK
(P.102)
CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
(P.114)
POWER DOOR LOCKS
(P.77)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.99)
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.127)
TRUNK RELEASE
BUTTON
(P.82)
FUEL FILL
DOOR RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.163)
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
(P.164)
52
Instruments and Controls
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
(P.178)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Indicator Lights
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
(P.56)
Premium model
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
(P.290)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
(P.58)
LOW OIL PRESSURE
INDICATOR
(P.55, 288)
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.56)
IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.56)
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR*
(P.56)
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.55, 289)
TRACTION CONTROL
SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.57)
*
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
(P.59)
SIDE AIRBAG
CUTOFF INDICATOR
(P.56)
SEAT BELT REMINDER LIGHT
(P.55)
DOOR AND TRUNK
OPEN MONITOR
(P.58)
BRAKE LAMP INDICATOR
(P.59)
PARKING BRAKE AND
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR*
(P.55)
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
Instruments and Controls
53
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Indicator Lights
T ype-S
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
(P.290)
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR
(P.58)
CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
(P.56)
VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR
(P.57)
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT
SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.56)
IMMOBILIZER
SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.56)
LOW OIL PRESSURE
INDICATOR
(P.55, 288)
ANTI-LOCK
BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR*
(P.56)
CHARGING SYSTEM
INDICATOR
(P.55, 289))
VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST
SYSTEM INDICATOR
(P.57)
*
LOW FUEL INDICATOR
(P.59)
SIDE AIRBAG
CUTOFF INDICATOR
(P.56)
SEAT BELT REMINDER LIGHT
(P.55)
DOOR AND TRUNK
OPEN MONITOR
(P.58)
BRAKE LAMP INDICATOR
(P.59)
PARKING BRAKE AND
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR*
(P.55)
The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.
54
Instruments and Controls
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Indicator Lights
The instrument panel has many
indicators to give you important
information about your car.
Seat Belt Reminder Light
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II). It is a
reminder to you and your passengers
to protect yourselves by fastening
the seat belts. A beeper also sounds
if you have not fastened your seat
belt.
If you do not fasten your seat belt,
the beeper will stop after a few
seconds but the light stays on until
you do. Both the light and the beeper
stay off if you fasten your seat belt
before turning on the ignition.
Low Oil Pressure
Indicator
The engine can be severely damaged
if this light flashes or stays on when
the engine is running. For complete
information, see page 288 .
Parking Brake and Brake System
Indicator
This light has two functions:
Charging System
Indicator
If this light comes on when the
engine is running, the battery is not
being charged. For complete
information, see page 289 .
1. This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch ON (II). It
is a reminder to check the parking
brake. Driving with the parking
brake not fully released can
damage the brakes and tires.
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp
See page 290 .
2. If the indicator remains lit after
you have fully released the
parking brake while the engine is
running, or if it comes on while
driving, it can indicate a problem
in the brake system. For complete
information, see page 292 .
U.S.
Canada
Instruments and Controls
55
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Indicator Lights
U.S.
Canada
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
Indicator
This light normally comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch ON (II), and when
the ignition switch is turned to
START (III). If this light comes on at
any other time, there is a problem in
the ABS. If this happens, take the
car to your dealer to have it checked.
With the light on, your car still has
normal braking ability but no antilock. For complete information, see
page 189 .
Immobilizer System
Indicator
This indicator comes on for a few
seconds when you turn the ignition
switch ON (II). It will then go off if
you have inserted a properly-coded
ignition key. If it is not a properlycoded key, the indicator will blink
and the engine will not start (see
page 74 ).
This indicator also blinks several
times when you turn the ignition
switch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0).
Cruise Control Indicator
This lights when you set the cruise
control. See page 151 for information
on operating the cruise control.
56
Instruments and Controls
Supplemental Restraint
System Indicator
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II). If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates a potential problem with
your front airbags. This light will
also alert you to a potential problem
with your side airbags, passenger’s
side airbag automatic cutoff system
or automatic seat belt tensioners.
For complete information, see page
46 .
Side Airbag Cutoff
Indicator
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II). If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates that the passenger’s side
airbag has automatically shut off.
For complete information, see page
47 .
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Indicator Lights
Vehicle Stability Assist
(VSA) System Indicator
VSA Activation Indicator
Traction Control System
(TCS) Indicator
On Type-S
On Type-S
On Premium model
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch ON (II).
This indicator has three functions:
This indicator has three functions:
1. It comes on as a reminder that you
have turned off the Vehicle
Stability Assist (VSA) system.
1. It comes on as a reminder that you
have turned off the Traction
Control System.
2. It flashes when VSA is active (see
page 193 ).
2. It flashes when the TCS is
regulating wheelspin.
3. It comes on along with the VSA
system indicator if there is a
problem with the VSA system.
3. If it comes on and stays on when
the Traction Control System is on,
it indicates that there is a problem
in the TCS.
If this light comes on and stays on at
any other time, or it does not come
on when you turn the ignition switch
ON (II), there is a problem with the
VSA system. Take the car to your
dealer to have it checked. Without
VSA, your car still has normal
driving ability, but will not have VSA
traction and stability enhancement.
See page 193 for more information
on the VSA system.
This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch ON (II). See page
193 for more information on the
VSA system.
This light also comes on when you
turn the ignition ON (II) and goes off
after the engine starts. See page
190 for more information on the
TCS.
Instruments and Controls
57
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Indicator Lights
Door and Trunk Open Monitor
The appropriate light comes on in
this display if the trunk or either
door is not closed tightly with the
ignition switch ON (II).
58
Instruments and Controls
Turn Signal and
Hazard Warning
Indicators
The left or right turn signal light
blinks when you signal a lane change
or turn. If the light does not blink or
blinks rapidly, it usually means one
of the turn signal bulbs is burned out
(see page 257 ). Replace the bulb as
soon as possible, since other drivers
cannot see that you are signalling.
When you turn on the Hazard
Warning switch, both turn signal
lights blink. All turn signals on the
outside of the car should flash.
High Beam Indicator
This light comes on with the high
beam headlights. See page 65 for
information on the headlight
controls.
On Canadian models, this indicator
comes on with reduced brightness
when the Daytime Running Lights
(DRL) are on (see page 67 ).
‘‘Daytime Running
Lights’’ Indicator
Canadian models only
This indicator lights when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II) with
the headlight switch off and the
parking brake set. It should go off if
you turn on the headlights or release
the parking brake. If it comes on at
any other time, it means there is a
problem with the DRL. There may
also be a problem with the high
beam headlights.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Indicator Lights
Low Fuel Indicator
This light comes on as a reminder
that you must refuel soon.
Brake Lamp Indicator
Washer Level Indicator
Canadian models only
This light comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer
fluid when you see this light come on
(see page 229 ).
If a brake light does not work, the
BRAKE LAMP indicator comes on
when you push the brake pedal with
the ignition switch ON (II).
A burned out brake light is a hazard
when drivers behind you cannot tell
you are braking. Have your brake
lights repaired right away.
Instruments and Controls
59
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Gauges
Speedometer
U.S. Models
This shows your speed in miles per
hour (mph). The smaller inner
numbers are the speed in kilometers
per hour (km/h).
TACHOMETER
SPEEDOMETER
TRIP METER
TEMPERATURE
GAUGE
SELECT
BUTTON
Canadian Models
This shows your speed in kilometers
per hour (km/h). The smaller inner
numbers are the speed in miles per
hour (mph).
Tachometer
The tachometer shows the engine
speed in revolutions per minute
(rpm). To protect the engine from
damage, never drive with the
tachometer needle in the red zone.
OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR
MAINTENANCE
REQUIRED INDICATOR
60
Instruments and Controls
FUEL GAUGE
ODOMETER
RESET
BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Gauges
Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance your car has been driven. It
measures miles in U.S. models and
kilometers in Canadian models.
It is illegal under U.S. federal law and
Canadian provincial regulations to
disconnect, reset, or alter the
odometer with the intent to change
the number of miles or kilometers
indicated.
Trip Meter
The trip meter shows the number of
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)
driven since you last reset it.
There are two trip meters: Trip A
and Trip B. Switch between these
displays by pressing the Select
button repeatedly. Each trip meter
works independently, so you can
keep track of two different distances.
When you turn the ignition switch
ON (II), what you last selected is
displayed.
SELECT
BUTTON
RESET
BUTTON
To reset a trip meter, display it, and
then press and hold the Reset button
until the number resets to ‘‘0.0’’. You
will hear a beep. Both trip meters
will reset if the car’s battery goes
dead or is disconnected.
Instruments and Controls
61
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Gauges
Outside Temperature Indicator
This indicator displays the outside
temperature in Fahrenheit in U.S.
models, and in Centigrade in
Canadian models.
The temperature sensor is located in
the front bumper. Therefore, the
temperature reading can be affected
by heat reflection from the road surface, engine heat, and the exhaust
from the surrounding traffic. This
can cause the temperature reading
not to be correct when your speed is
under 19 mph (30 km/h).
In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
forming on the road surface.
62
Instruments and Controls
Temperature Gauge
This shows the temperature of the
engine’s coolant. During normal
operation, the pointer should rise
from the bottom mark to about the
middle of the gauge. In severe
driving conditions, such as very hot
weather or a long period of uphill
driving, the pointer may rise to near
the upper red mark. If it reaches the
red (Hot) mark, pull safely to the
side of the road. Turn to page 286 for
instructions and precautions on
checking the engine’s cooling
system.
Fuel Gauge
This shows how much fuel you have.
It is most accurate when the car is on
level ground. It may show slightly
more or less than the actual amount
when you are driving on curvy or
hilly roads.
The needle returns to the bottom
after you turn off the ignition. The
gauge shows the fuel level reading
immediately after you turn the
ignition switch back ON (II).
Please ref uel early, as driving to the
last drop of f uel can result in damage
to the engine and/or three way catalytic
converter.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Gauges
Maintenance Required Indicator
Between 6,000 miles (9,600 km) and
7,500 miles (12,000 km) this
indicator will light for two seconds
when you first turn the ignition
switch ON (II), and then flash for
ten seconds.
If you exceed 7,500 miles (12,000
km) without having the scheduled
maintenance performed, this
indicator will remain on as a constant
reminder.
MAINTENANCE REQUIRED INDICATOR
This indicator reminds you that it is
time to take your car in for
scheduled maintenance.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules
for Normal and Severe Driving
Conditions on pages 210 − 214 .
For the first 6,000 miles (9,600 km)
after the Maintenance Required
Indicator is reset, it will come on for
two seconds when you turn the
ignition switch ON (II).
Your dealer will reset this indicator
after completing the scheduled
maintenance. If this maintenance is
done by someone other than your
Acura dealer, reset the indicator as
follows.
SELECT
BUTTON
RESET
BUTTON
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Press and hold the select and reset
buttons next to the instrument panel, then turn the ignition switch
ON (II).
3. Hold the buttons for
approximately ten seconds until
the indicator resets.
Instruments and Controls
63
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
The two levers on the steering
column contain controls for driving
features you use most often. The left
lever controls the turn signals,
headlights, and high beams. The
right lever controls the windshield
washers and wipers.
TRACTION
CONTROL/VEHICLE
STABILITY ASSIST
SYSTEM ON/OFF
SWITCH
HEADLIGHTS/
TURN SIGNALS
WINDSHIELD
WIPERS/WASHERS
REAR WINDOW
DEFOGGER
MOONROOF
SWITCH
The switch for the hazard warning
lights is on the dashboard to the
right of the steering column.
The controls under the left air vent
are for the moonroof, the cruise
control, and the VSA/TCS.
The tilt adjustment lever on the
underside of the steering column
allows you to tilt the steering wheel.
* : To use the horn, press the pad
around the ‘‘A’’ logo.
CRUISE
CONTROL
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS
64
Instruments and Controls
HORN*
TILT ADJUSTMENT
HAZARD WARNING
LIGHTS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Headlights
When you turn on the headlights
(low or high beam), the road lamps
in the front bumper will also come on.
If you leave the lights on with the
ignition switch in ACCESSORY (I)
or LOCK (0), you will hear a
reminder chime when you open the
driver’s door.
The rotating switch on the left lever
controls the lights. Turning this
switch to the
position turns on
the parking lights, taillights, side
marker lights, and rear license plate
lights. Turning the switch to the
position turns on the
headlights.
To change between low beams and
high beams, pull the turn signal lever
until you hear a click, then let go.
The blue high beam indicator will
light (see page 58 ).
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
65
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
To flash the high beams, pull the
turn signal lever back lightly, then
release it. The high beams will come
on and go off.
The high beams will stay on for as
long as you hold the lever back, no
matter what position the headlight
switch is in.
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
The Automatic Lighting Off feature
turns off the headlights, road lamps,
parking lights, taillights, side marker
lights, license plate lights and
instrument panel lights within 15
seconds of removing the key from
the ignition switch and closing the
driver’s door.
This feature activates if you leave
the headlight switch in the ‘‘
’’
or ‘‘
’’ position, remove the key,
open, then close the driver’s door.
If you remove the key from the
ignition switch with the headlight
switch on, but do not open the door
and get out, the lights will turn off
after ten minutes.
66
Instruments and Controls
The lights will turn on again when
you unlock or open the driver’s door.
If you unlock the door, but do not
open it within 15 seconds, the lights
will go off. With the driver’s door
open, you will hear a lights-on
reminder chime.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Daytime Running Lights
(Canadian Models)
With the headlight switch off, the
high beam headlights come on with
reduced brightness when you turn
the ignition switch to ON (II) and
release the parking brake. They
remain on until you turn the ignition
off, even if you set the parking brake.
Instrument Panel Brightness
Turn Signals
INSTRUMENT PANEL
BRIGHTNESS DIAL
The headlights revert to normal
operation when you turn them on
with the switch.
TURN SIGNAL LEVER
The dial on the dashboard to the left
of the instrument panel is used to
adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel lights. Turn the dial
to adjust the brightness.
Signal a turn or lane change with this
lever. Push down on the lever to
signal a left turn, and up to signal a
right turn. If you push it up or down
all the way, the turn signal continues
to blink even when you release the
lever. It shuts off automatically as
you complete the turn.
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
67
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
To signal a lane change, push lightly
on the turn signal lever in the proper
direction and hold it. The lever will
return to the center position as soon
as you release it.
Windshield Wipers
The right lever controls the windshield wipers and washers. The
rotary switch at the end of the lever
has three positions:
INT: intermittent
: low speed
: high speed
68
Instruments and Controls
In intermittent, the wipers operate
every few seconds. The sweep
interval will change slightly with
speed; getting shorter as you drive
faster. In low speed and high speed,
the wipers run continuously.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Windshield Washers
You can vary how often the wipers
sweep the windshield by turning the
INT TIME ring next to the rotary
switch.
If you turn the INT TIME ring to the
shortest delay, the wipers will
change from intermittent to low
speed operation when vehicle speed
exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
To operate the wipers in mist mode,
push the control lever down. The
wipers run at high speed until you
release the lever. This gives you a
quick way to clear the windshield.
To clean the windshield, pull back on
the wiper control lever. The washers
spray until you release the lever. The
wipers run at low speed while you’re
pulling the lever, then complete one
more sweep of the windshield after
you release it.
Instruments and Controls
69
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
Hazard Warning
Cars without navigation system
Push the red button to turn on the
hazard warning lights (four-way
flashers). This causes all four
outside turn signals and both
indicators in the instrument panel to
flash. Use the hazard warning lights
if you need to park in a dangerous
area near heavy traffic, or if your car
is disabled.
70
Instruments and Controls
Rear Window Defogger
Cars with navigation system
Cars without navigation system
The rear window defogger will clear
fog, frost, and thin ice from the
window. Push the defogger button to
turn it on and off. The light in the
button lights to show the defogger is
on. If you do not turn it off, the
defogger will shut itself off after
about 25 minutes. It also shuts off
when you turn off the ignition. You
have to turn it on again when you
restart the car.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
The defogger and antenna wires on
the inside of the rear window can be
accidentally damaged. When
cleaning the glass, always wipe side
to side.
Steering Wheel Adjustment
See page 17 for important safety
information about how to properly
position the steering wheel.
Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.
Cars with navigation system
Make sure the rear window is clear
and you have good visibility before
starting to drive.
Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
car and be seriously injured in a
crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only
when the car is stopped.
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
71
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
3. Push the lever up to lock the
steering wheel in that position.
4. Make sure you have securely
locked the steering wheel in place
by trying to move it up and down.
To adjust the steering wheel upward
or downward:
1. Push the lever under the steering
column all the way down.
2. Move the steering wheel to the
desired position, making sure the
wheel points toward your chest,
not toward your face. Make sure
you can see the instrument panel
gauges and the indicator lights.
72
Instruments and Controls
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keys and Locks
Keys
KEY NUMBER PLATE
MASTER
KEYS
(Black)
VALET KEY
(Gray)
the plate stored in a safe place. If you
need to replace a key, use only an
Acura-approved key blank.
These keys contain electronic
circuits that are activated by the
Immobilizer System. They will not
work to start the engine if the
circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct
sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Your car comes with two master
keys and a valet key.
The master key fits all the locks on
your car:
• Ignition
• Doors
• Trunk pass-through cover
• Glove box
• Rear console compartment
The valet key works only in the
ignition and the door locks. You can
keep the trunk pass-through cover,
glove box, and rear console
compartment locked when you leave
your car and the valet key at a
parking facility.
You should have received a key
number plate with your keys. You
will need this key number if you ever
have to get a lost key replaced. Keep
Do not drop the keys or set heavy
objects on them.
Keep the keys away from liquids.
If they get wet, dry them immediately with a soft cloth.
The keys do not contain batteries.
Do not try to take them apart.
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
73
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keys and Locks
Remote Transmitter
Your car also comes with two remote
transmitters; see page 78 for an
explanation of the operation.
Immobilizer System
The Immobilizer System protects
your car from theft. A properlycoded master or valet key must be
used in the ignition switch for the
engine to start. If an improperlycoded key (or other device) is used,
the engine’s fuel system is disabled.
When you turn the ignition switch to
ON (II), the Immobilizer System
indicator should come on for a few
seconds, then go out. If the indicator
starts to blink, it means the system
does not recognize the coding of the
key. Turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0), remove the key, reinsert
it, and turn the switch to ON (II)
again.
74
Instruments and Controls
The system may not recognize your
key’s coding if another immobilizer
key or other metal object is near the
ignition switch when you insert the
key. To make sure the system
recognizes the key code:
Do not keep other immobilizer
keys on the same key ring.
Use a plastic or leather key fob,
not metal.
Keep other keys away from your
car’s key and the ignition switch
while trying to start the engine.
If the system repeatedly does not
recognize the coding of your key,
contact your Acura dealer.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keys and Locks
This indicator will also blink several
times when you turn the ignition
switch from ON (II) to ACCESSORY
(I) or LOCK (0).
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it. Electrical
problems could result that may make
your car undriveable.
If you have lost your key and you
cannot start the engine, contact your
Acura dealer.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Ignition Switch
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
The ignition switch is on the right
side of the steering column. It has
four positions:
• LOCK (0)
• ACCESSORY (I)
• ON (II)
• START (III)
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
75
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keys and Locks
LOCK (0) − You can insert or
remove the key only in this position.
To switch from ACCESSORY to
LOCK, you must push the key in
slightly as you turn it. The shift lever
must also be in Park. The anti-theft
lock will lock the steering column
when you remove the key.
If the front wheels are turned, the
anti-theft lock may sometimes make
it difficult to turn the key from
LOCK to ACCESSORY. Firmly turn
the steering wheel to the left or to
the right as you turn the key.
76
Instruments and Controls
ACCESSORY (I) − In this position,
you can operate the audio system
and the accessory power sockets.
ON (II) − This is the normal key
position when driving. All features
and accessories on the car are usable.
Several of the lights on the instrument panel come on as a test when
you turn the ignition switch from
ACCESSORY to ON.
START (III) − Use this position
only to start the engine. The switch
returns to ON (II) when you let go of
the key.
The engine will not start if the
Immobilizer System does not
recognize the key’s coding (see page
74 ).
You will hear a reminder beeper if
you leave the key in the ignition
switch in the LOCK (0) or
ACCESSORY (I) position and open
the driver’s door. Remove the key to
turn off the beeper.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keys and Locks
Power Door Locks
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
LOCK TAB
To lock the passenger’s door when
getting out of the car, push the lock
tab down and close the door. To lock
the driver’s door, remove the key
from the ignition switch and push
the lock tab down or push the master
switch down, then close the door.
Both doors can be locked from the
outside by using the key in either
door.
Each door has a master door lock
switch. Either switch locks and
unlocks both doors. Push the switch
down to lock both doors and up to
unlock them.
Each door has a lock tab at the top of
the door. When you push down the
lock tab on the driver’s door, both
doors lock. Pulling up the lock tab on
the driver’s door only unlocks that
door. The lock tab on the passenger’s
door only locks and unlocks that
door.
To unlock only the driver’s door
from the outside, insert the key in
the driver’s door lock, turn the key
and release it. If you turn the key
and hold it, both doors will unlock.
Both doors will unlock when you
unlock the passenger’s door with the
key.
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
77
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keys and Locks
Lockout Prevention
If you forget and leave the key in the
ignition switch, Lockout Prevention
will not allow you to lock the driver’s
door. With the driver’s door open
and the key in the ignition, both
master door lock switches are
disabled. However, if the driver’s
door is not open, the master door
lock switches are not disabled.
Pushing the switch down on the
open passenger’s door will lock both
doors. If you try to lock an open
driver’s door by pushing down the
lock tab, the tabs on both doors pop
up. Pushing down the lock tab on the
passenger’s door only locks that door.
78
Instruments and Controls
Remote Transmitter
LED
LOCK
BUTTON
UNLOCK
BUTTON
TRUNK
RELEASE
BUTTON
PANIC
BUTTON
You can lock and unlock your car
with the remote transmitter. When
you push the LOCK button, both
doors lock. The parking lights, side
marker lights, taillights and license
plate light will flash once.
When you push the LOCK button a
second time within 5 seconds after
you have locked the doors, you will
hear a beep to verify that the doors
are locked and the security system
has set.
When you push the UNLOCK button
once, only the driver’s door unlocks.
The passenger’s door unlocks when
you push the button a second time.
The parking lights, side marker
lights, taillights and license plate
light flash twice each time you push
the button.
The ceiling light (if the ceiling light
switch is in the center position) will
come on when you press the
UNLOCK button. If you do not open
either door, the light stays on for
about 10 seconds, then fades out. If
you relock the doors with the remote
transmitter before 10 seconds have
elapsed, the light will go off
immediately.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keys and Locks
If you unlock the doors with the
remote transmitter, but do not open
either door within 30 seconds, the
doors automatically relock and the
security system sets.
Recalling a Memorized Driving
Position
With Memory 1
With Memory 2
The driving position memory
activated (Memory 1, Memory 2) is
shown on the back of each
transmitter. Make sure you store
your desired driving position in the
memory that is activated by the
transmitter you normally carry.
You cannot lock the doors with the
remote transmitter if either door is
not fully closed or the key is in the
ignition switch. You cannot unlock
the doors with the key in the ignition
switch.
To open the trunk, push the Trunk
Release button for approximately
one second.
You can open the trunk with the
remote transmitter regardless of the
position of the main switch in the
glove box. The trunk will not open if
the key is in the ignition switch.
If the seat and mirrors are already in
the proper positions, you will hear
three beeps when you open the door.
The remote transmitters will also
activate the Driving Position
Memory System (see page 95 ).
When you open the driver’s door
after unlocking it with the remote
transmitter, you will hear a beep.
The driver’s seat and outside mirrors
move to the positions stored in that
memory location. You will hear two
beeps when the movement is
complete.
You can turn off this driving position
memory activation. While standing
near the car, press and hold the
LOCK and UNLOCK buttons at the
same time. The LED in the remote
transmitter will blink twice. Then
release the buttons.
To turn it back on, repeat this
procedure. The LED will come on
for one second to indicate the
feature has been turned on.
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
79
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keys and Locks
Panic Mode
Replacing the Battery
Panic mode allows you to remotely
activate your car’s security system to
attract attention. When activated, the
horn will sound, and the exterior
lights will flash, for about 30 seconds.
To activate panic mode, press and
hold the PANIC button for about two
seconds.
ROUND
COVER
Open
To cancel Panic mode before 30
seconds, press any button on the
remote transmitter. You can also
turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Panic mode will not activate if the
ignition switch is in the ON (II)
position.
Close
When the remote transmitter’s
battery begins to get weak, it may
take several pushes on the button to
lock or unlock the doors, and the
LED will not light. Replace the
battery as soon as possible.
Battery type: CR2025
80
Instruments and Controls
BATTERY
To replace the battery, remove the
round cover on the back of the transmitter by turning it counterclockwise
with a coin.
Remove the old battery and note the
polarity. Make sure the polarity of
the new battery is the same (+ side
facing up), then insert it in the
transmitter.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keys and Locks
Align the ▽ mark on the cover
with the
mark on the
transmitter, then set the cover in
place and turn it clockwise.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Transmitter Care
Avoid severe shock to the transmitter, such as dropping or throwing
it. Also, protect it from extreme hot
or cold temperatures.
Clean the transmitter case with a
soft cloth. Do not use strong
cleaners or solvents that could harm
the case. Immersing the transmitter
in any liquid will harm the transmitter and cause it to not function
properly.
If you lose a transmitter, you will
need to have the replacement
programmed to your car’s system by
your Acura dealer. Any other
transmitters you have will also need
to be reprogrammed.
Instruments and Controls
81
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keys and Locks
Trunk
TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON
TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE
To close the trunk, press down on
the trunk lid.
See page 171 for cargo loading and
weight limit information. Keep the
trunk lid closed at all times while
driving to avoid damaging the lid,
and to prevent exhaust gas from
getting into the interior. See Carbon
Monoxide Hazard on page 49 .
You can open the trunk in three
ways:
Press the trunk release button on
the driver’s door.
Press and hold the trunk release
button on the remote transmitter
for approximately one second (see
page 78 ).
82
Instruments and Controls
Reach through the trunk passthrough and pull the trunk release
handle.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keys and Locks
2. Lock the glove box with the
master key.
3. Make sure the trunk pass-through
cover is locked (see page 92 ).
4. Give the person the valet key.
Even if the trunk main switch is
turned off, you can open the trunk
with the remote transmitter.
TRUNK MAIN SWITCH
To protect items in the trunk when
you need to give the key to someone
else:
1. Disable the trunk release button
on the driver’s door by turning off
the trunk main switch in the glove
box.
Instruments and Controls
83
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keys and Locks
Emergency Trunk Opener
Parents should decide if their
children should be shown how to use
this feature.
For more information about child
safety, see pages 23 and 24 .
EMERGENCY TRUNK OPENER
U.S. models only
As a safety feature, your car has a
release lever on the trunk latch so
the trunk can be opened from the
inside.
To open the trunk, push the release
lever to the left.
84
Instruments and Controls
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Keys and Locks
Glove Box
Rear Console Compartment
An open glove box can cause
serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat
belt.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving.
GLOVE
BOX
Open the glove box by squeezing the
handle. Close it with a firm push.
Lock or unlock the glove box with
the master key.
The glove box light comes on only
when the parking lights are on.
REAR CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
The rear console compartment is
located in the center of the rear seat.
To open the rear console
compartment, pull up on the lever
and lift the lid. To close, lower the lid
and push it down until it latches.
The rear console compartment can
be locked and unlocked only with the
master key.
Instruments and Controls
85
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seat Adjustments
See pages 13 − 14 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.
Driver’s Seat Adjustments
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
Your Acura has power adjustable
driver’s seat. The two power seat
adjustment switches are on the
outside edge of the seat bottom. The
front passenger’s seat is also poweradjustable.
You can adjust the power seats with
the ignition switch in any position.
The long horizontal switch adjusts
the seat bottom in several directions.
The short vertical switch adjusts the
seat-back angle.
Push the horizontal switch forward
or backward to move the seat
forward or backward.
86
Instruments and Controls
Pull up or push down on the front of
the switch to move the seat bottom’s
front edge up or down. Pull up or
push down on the rear of the switch
to move the rear of the seat bottom
up or down.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seat Adjustments
The driver’s seat includes a memory
feature. Two seat positions can be
stored in separate memories. You
can then select a memorized position
by pushing the appropriate memory
button or using the remote
transmitter. Refer to page 95 for
how to memorize and select seat
positions.
Pull the center of the horizontal
switch up to raise the seat. Push it
down to lower the seat.
Adjust the seat-back angle by
pushing the rear switch in the
direction you want to move.
Instruments and Controls
87
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seat Adjustments
Driver’s Lumbar Support
Front Passenger’s Seat
Adjustments
See pages 13 − 14 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position seats and seat-backs.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
You can adjust the seat with the
ignition switch in any position.
Vary the lumbar support by moving
the lever on the right side of the
seat-back. Move the lever forward or
backward to adjust the lumbar
support through its full range.
The seat adjustment switches are on
the outside edge of the seat bottom.
Push the long horizontal switch
forward or backward to move the
seat bottom in that direction.
Adjust the seat-back angle by
pushing the vertical switch in the
direction you want to move.
88
Instruments and Controls
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seat Adjustments
Rear Seat Access
After you return the seat-back to the
upright position, the seat bottom will
automatically return to its original
position.
Sitting down heavily in the seat as it
is moving backward can also cause
the seat to react as if it has run into
an obstacle.
If the seat runs into any obstacle,
such as a large package on the floor
between the front and rear seats
while it is moving back to its original
position, the seat will stop and move
forward slightly.
RELEASE LEVER
To get into the rear seat, open the
door and pull the release lever up on
the side of the seat-back. The seatback will tilt forward and the entire
seat will move forward to allow
easier entry to the rear seat.
Remove the obstacle, then move the
seat to the desired position with the
adjustment switch.
To move the driver’s seat, you can
select the memorized position with
the memory button.
Instruments and Controls
89
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seat Adjustments
To remove a head restraint for
cleaning or repair, pull it up as far as
it will go. Push the release button
and pull the restraint out of the seatback.
Head Restraints
See page 15 for important safety
information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.
The front head restraints help
protect you and your passenger from
whiplash and other injuries. They are
most effective when you adjust them
so the back of the occupant’s head
rests against the center of the
restraint. A taller person should
adjust the restraint as high as
possible.
90
Instruments and Controls
RELEASE BUTTON
The front head restraints adjust for
height. You need both hands to
adjust the restraint. Do not attempt
to adjust it while driving. To raise it,
pull upward. To lower the restraint,
push the release button sideways
and push the restraint down.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Armrest
Make sure the passengers’ hands or
fingers are away from the armrest
before moving it.
The lid of the console compartment
can be used as an armrest by moving
it forward and backward. Make sure
the armrest is securely latched.
The rear seat armrest is located at
the center of the rear seat. Pivot it
down to use it.
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
91
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Armrest
Trunk Pass-through Cover
KNOB
Make sure all items in the trunk and
those extending through the passthrough are secured.
For security, this cover can be
locked and unlocked only with the
master key. To lock the cover, insert
the key and turn it clockwise.
COVER
The pass-through cover can be
opened from either side; it folds
forward onto the center armrest.
Open the cover by sliding the knob
downward and pushing or pulling on
the cover. To close the cover, swing
it up and push firmly on the top.
Make sure it latches properly.
92
Instruments and Controls
Never drive with this cover open and
the trunk lid open.
See Carbon Monoxide Hazard on
page 49 .
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Mirrors
Keep the inside and outside mirrors
clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
Adjusting the Power Mirrors
SELECTOR SWITCH
SENSOR
INDICATOR
AUTO BUTTON
The inside mirror can automatically
darken to reduce glare. To turn on
this feature, press the button on the
bottom of the mirror. The AUTO
indicator comes on as a reminder.
When it is on, the mirror darkens
when it senses the headlights of a
vehicle behind you, then returns to
normal visibility when the lights are
gone. Press the button again to turn
off this sensing.
Adjust the outside mirrors with the
adjustment switch on the driver’s
door armrest:
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
2. Move the selector switch to L
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s
side).
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
93
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Mirrors
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH
3. Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to move the
mirror right, left, up, or down.
4. When you finish, move the
selector switch to the center (off)
position. This turns off the
adjustment switch so you can’t
move a mirror out of position by
accidentally bumping the switch.
With the selector switch in the
center (off) position, the passenger’s
side mirror will pivot downward
slightly when you shift the
transmission into reverse. This will
give you a better view of that side of
the vehicle while parallel parking.
The mirror returns to its original
position when you take the
transmission out of reverse.
Outside mirror positions can be
stored in the driving position
memory system (see page 95 ).
94
Instruments and Controls
HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
The outside mirrors are heated to remove fog and frost. With the ignition
switch ON (II), turn on the heaters
by pressing the button. The light in
the button comes on as a reminder.
Press the button again to turn the
heaters off.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Driving Position Memory System
Your Acura has a memory feature
for the driver’s seat and outside
mirror positions.
Two seat and outside mirror
positions, for different drivers or
driving conditions, can be stored in
separate memories. You select a
memorized position by pushing the
appropriate button or using the
appropriate remote transmitter
(Memory 1 or Memory 2).
Storing a Driving Position in Memory
Store a driving position as explained
in this section only when the car is
parked.
MEMO BUTTON
1. Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
You cannot add a new driving
position in the memory unless the
ignition switch is ON (II). You can
recall a memorized position with
the ignition switch in any position.
2. Adjust the seat to a comfortable
position (see page 86 ).
Adjust the outside mirrors for best
visibility (see page 93 ).
3. Press and release the MEMO
button on the control panel. You
will hear a beep. Immediately
press and hold one of the memory
buttons (1 or 2) until you hear two
beeps. The indicator light in the
memory button will come on. The
current positions of the driver’s
seat and outside mirrors are now
stored.
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
95
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Driving Position Memory System
Doing any of the following after
pressing the MEMO button will
cancel the storing procedure.
Selecting a Memorized Position
MEMORY BUTTONS
Not pressing a memory button
within 5 seconds.
Readjusting the seat position.
Readjusting the outside mirror
position.
Each memory button stores only one
driving position. Storing a new
position erases the previous setting
stored in that button’s memory. If
you want to add a new position while
retaining the current one, use the
other memory button.
1. Make sure the parking brake is set
and the shift lever is in Park.
All stored driving positions will be
lost if your car’s battery goes dead or
is disconnected.
2. Press the desired memory button
(1 or 2) until you hear a beep, then
release the button.
96
Instruments and Controls
You can select memorized positions
as follows.
The system will move the seat and
outside mirrors to the memorized
positions. The indicator light in the
selected memory button will flash
during movement. When the
adjustments are complete, you will
hear two beeps and the indicator
light will remain on.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Driving Position Memory System
To stop the system’s automatic adjustment;
Press any button on the control
panel: MEMO, 1 or 2.
Push any of the adjustment
switches for the seat.
Shift out of Park.
Adjust the outside mirrors.
If desired, you can use the
adjustment switches to change the
positions of the seat or outside
mirrors after they are in their
memorized position. If you change
the memorized position, the
indicator light in the memory button
will go out. To keep this driving
position for later use, you must store
it in the driving position memory.
Instruments and Controls
97
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Seat Heaters
The HI or LO indicator lights and
remains lit until you turn it off by
pushing the opposite side of the
switch lightly. The indicator will turn
off.
SEAT HEATERS
Both front seats are equipped with
seat heaters. The ignition switch
must be ON (II) to use them. Push
the front of the switch, HI, to rapidly
heat up the seat. After the seat
reaches a comfortable temperature,
select LO by pushing the back of the
switch. This will keep the seat warm.
98
Instruments and Controls
In HI, the heater turns off when the
seat gets warm, and turns back on
after the seat’s temperature drops. It
continues to cycle as long as you
leave it set on HI. The HI indicator
remains lit as a reminder that you
have the heater on.
In LO, the heater runs continuously.
It does not cycle with temperature
changes.
Because of the sensors for the side
airbag system, there is no heater in
the passenger’s seat-back.
Follow these precautions whenever
you use the seat heaters:
Use the HI setting only to heat the
seats quickly. Select the LO
setting when the seats feel warm.
The HI setting draws large
amounts of current from the
battery.
Do not use the seat heaters, even
on the LO setting, if the engine is
left idling for an extended period.
They can weaken the battery,
causing hard starting.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Power Windows
Your car’s windows are electricallypowered. Turn the ignition switch to
ON (II) to raise or lower either
window.
Each door has a switch that controls
its window. To open the window,
push the switch down and hold it.
Release the switch when you want
the window to stop. Close the
window by pulling back on the
switch and holding it.
DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH
Closing a power window on
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are
away from the windows before
closing them.
MAIN SWITCH
The driver’s armrest has a master
power window control panel. To
open the passenger’s window, push
down on the switch and hold it until
the window reaches the desired
position. To close the window, pull
back on the window switch. Release
the switch when the window gets to
the position you want.
CONTINUED
Instruments and Controls
99
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Power Windows
The master control panel also contains these extra features:
AUTO − To open the driver’s
window fully, push the window
switch firmly down and release it.
The window automatically goes all
the way down. To stop the window
from going all the way down, pull
back on the window switch briefly.
To open the driver’s window only
partially, push the window switch
down lightly and hold it. The window
will stop as soon as you release the
switch.
The AUTO function only works to
lower the driver’s window. To raise
the window, you must pull back on
the window switch and hold it until
the window reaches the desired
position.
100
Instruments and Controls
The MAIN switch controls power to
the passenger’s window. With this
switch off, the passenger’s window
cannot be raised or lowered. The
MAIN switch does not affect the
driver’s window. Keep the MAIN
switch off when you have children in
the car so they do not injure
themselves by operating the window
unintentionally. The lights inside the
switches come on when you turn the
ignition switch to ON (II).
The power window system has a keyoff delay function. The windows will
still operate for up to ten minutes
after you turn off the ignition.
Opening either door cancels the
delay function. You must turn the
ignition switch ON (II) again before
you can raise or lower the windows.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Moonroof
MOONROOF SWITCH
The moonroof has two positions: it
can be tilted up in the back for
ventilation, or it can be slid back into
the roof. Use the switch under the
left dashboard vent to operate the
moonroof. The ignition switch must
be ON (II).
To tilt up the back of the moonroof,
press and hold the center button
(
). To close the moonroof,
press and hold the top of the switch
(
). To open the moonroof,
press and hold the bottom of the
switch (
). Release the switch
when the moonroof gets to the
desired position. Make sure
everyone’s hands are away from the
moonroof before opening or closing
it.
Opening or closing the
moonroof on someone’s hands
or fingers can cause serious
injury.
The moonroof has a key-off delay.
You can still open and close the
moonroof for up to ten minutes after
you turn off the ignition. The key-off
delay cancels as soon as you open
either door. You must then turn the
ignition ON (II) for the moonroof to
operate.
If you try to open the moonroof in
below-f reezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
damage the moonroof panel or motor.
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
Instruments and Controls
101
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Parking Brake, Digital Clock
Parking Brake
Digital Clock
Driving the car with the parking brake
applied can damage the rear brakes
and axles.
H
M R
PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
To apply the parking brake, push the
parking brake pedal down with your
foot. To release the parking brake,
push on the pedal again. The parking
brake light on the instrument panel
should go out when the parking
brake is fully released with the
engine running. (see page 55 .)
102
Instruments and Controls
3.2 CL without Navigation System
The digital clock displays the time
with the ignition switch in any
position.
To set the clock:
1. Press and hold the H button until
the hour advances to the desired
time.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Digital Clock, Sunglasses Holder
2. Press and hold the M button until
the numbers advance to the
desired time.
You can use R to quickly set the time
to the nearest hour. If the displayed
time is before the half hour, pressing
R sets the clock back to the previous
hour. If the displayed time is after
the half hour, pressing R sets the
clock forward to the beginning of the
next hour.
For example:
1:06 would RESET to 1:00.
1:52 would RESET to 2:00.
Sunglasses Holder
Push
SUNGLASSES HOLDER
To open the sunglasses holder, push
on the front edge. It will unlatch and
swing down. To close it, push it until
it latches. Make sure the holder is
closed while you are driving.
Some larger styles of sunglasses
may not fit in the holder.
You may also store small items in
this holder. Make sure they are
small enough to let the holder close
and latch, and that they are not
heavy enough to cause the holder to
pop open while driving.
Instruments and Controls
103
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Beverage Holder
To open the beverage holder, push
on the button. The beverage holder
lid is spring-loaded and will
swing open. To close it, push either
half of the lid closed.
Be careful when you are using the
beverage holder. A spilled liquid that
is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Spilled liquids can also
damage the upholstery, carpeting,
and electrical components in the
interior.
104
Instruments and Controls
The beverage holder can be
removed. To remove it, lift up the
front of the holder by holding it at
the middle. To reinstall it, put in the
back of the holder, align the front
tabs in the slots and push down the
front of the holder.
The rear seat also has a beverage
holder in the center armrest. To use
it, pivot the armrest down.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Console Compartment, Coin Box
Console Compartment
LEVER
Coin Box
LEVER
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
To open the console compartment,
pull up on the left lever and lift the
lid.
To close, lower the lid and push it
down until it latches.
COIN BOX
You can put small items in the tray
located in the console compartment
lid. To use the tray, pull up on the
right lever and lift up the armrest
pad.
The coin box is located under the
audio system. To open the coin box,
pull the bottom edge. Close it with a
firm push.
The console compartment light
comes on only when the parking
lights are on.
Instruments and Controls
105
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Console Pocket
CONSOLE POCKET
To open the console pocket, swing
the upper edge of the lid down.
106
Instruments and Controls
To remove the pocket, open it, then
take it out of its hinges by lifting it
up and out. Do not try to pull the
pocket out forcibly. You could
damage it.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Storage Tray, Coat Hook
Storage Tray
Coat Hook
LID
STORAGE TRAY
3.2 CL without Navigation System
The storage tray is located above the
audio system. Push on the center of
the tray to get it to pop out. Then
remove it by pulling it straight out.
You can put a writing pad, pen, and
small items in the inner box in the
storage tray. Lift the lid to use the
tray.
To reinstall the storage tray into the
dashboard, close the lid, then push
the storage tray in until it latches.
To use a coat hook, push on the lid.
Close it with a firm push.
Make sure the coat hook is closed
when you are not using it. This hook
is not designed for large or heavy
items.
Instruments and Controls
107
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Sun Visor, Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor
Make sure you put the sun visor
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the car. Do not use the
sun visor extension over the rear
view mirror.
Vanity Mirror
EXTENSION
To use the sun visor, pull it down.
You can also use the sun visor at the
side window. Remove the support
rod from the clip and swing the sun
visor toward the side window. In this
position, the sun visor can be
extended by sliding out the
extension.
108
Instruments and Controls
To use a vanity mirror on the back of
the sun visor, pull up the cover.
The lights beside the mirror come
on only when the parking lights are
on.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Accessory Power Sockets
COVER
These sockets are intended to supply
power for 12 volt DC accessories
that are rated 120 watts or less (10
amps).
They will not power an automotive
type cigarette lighter element.
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
Your car has two accessory power
sockets. One is located on the front
panel next to the coin box, and the
other is in the console compartment.
To use an accessory power socket,
the ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).
ACCESSORY POWER SOCKET
To use the socket in the console
compartment, pull the cover up.
To open the socket on the front
panel, pull the cover down.
Instruments and Controls
109
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Interior Lights
Ceiling Light
OFF
ON
DOOR ACTIVATED
The ceiling light has a three-position
switch. In the OFF position, the light
does not come on. In the center
position, the ceiling light comes on
when you open either door. The light
fades out after both doors are closed.
In the ON position, the ceiling light
stays on continuously.
110
Instruments and Controls
The ceiling light (with the switch in
the center position) comes on when
you remove the key from the ignition
switch. If you do not open a door, the
light stays on, then fades out in
about 10 seconds.
The ceiling light (with the switch in
the center position) also comes on
when you unlock the door with the
remote transmitter (see page 78 ). If
you relock the door, the light turns
off immediately. Otherwise, it
remains on, then fades out in about
10 seconds.
Spotlights
Turn on the spotlights by pushing
the button next to each light. Push
the button again to turn it off. You
can use the spotlights at all times.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Interior Lights
Courtesy Lights
The courtesy light in each door
comes on when the door is opened,
and goes out when the door is closed.
Your car also has a courtesy light in
the ignition switch. This light comes
on when you open the driver’s door.
It remains on for several seconds
after the door is closed.
Instruments and Controls
111
Main Menu
112
Main Menu
Comfort and Convenience Features
The climate control system in your
Acura provides a comfortable driving
environment in all weather conditions.
Climate Control System ................ 114
3.2 CL without Navigation System
Fully-automatic Operation ........ 116
Semi-automatic Operation ........ 117
3.2 CL with Navigation System
The standard audio system has
many features. This section describes those features and how to
use them.
Your Acura has an anti-theft audio
system that requires a code number
to enable it.
The security system helps to discourage vandalism and theft of your
Acura.
Fully-automatic Operation ........ 121
Semi-automatic Operation ........ 122
Sunlight Sensor/
Temperature Sensor ............. 126
Audio System ................................. 127
Operating the Radio .................. 128
Adjusting the Sound .................. 131
Audio System Lighting ............. 132
Radio Frequencies ..................... 132
Radio Reception ......................... 132
Operating the Cassette
Player ...................................... 134
Tape Search Functions ............. 135
Caring for the Cassette
Player ...................................... 138
Operating the CD Changer ...... 139
Loading CDs in the Changer ... 140
Operation .................................... 142
Removing CDs from the
Changer .................................. 144
Protecting Compact Discs ........ 146
CD Changer Error
Indications .............................. 147
Remote Audio Controls ............ 148
Theft Protection ........................ 149
Security System ............................. 150
Cruise Control ................................ 151
HomeLink Universal
Transceiver................................. 155
Comfort and Convenience Features
113
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
The automatic climate control
system in your Acura picks the
proper combination of air conditioning, heating, and ventilation to
maintain the interior temperature
you select. The system also adjusts
the fan speed and air flow levels.
CENTER VENT
Open
The direction of air flow from the
vents in the center and each side of
the dashboard is adjustable. Move
the tab in the center of each vent upand-down and side-to-side.
The side vents can be opened and
closed with the dials underneath
them.
114
Comfort and Convenience Features
DRIVER’S-SIDE VENT
Close
The climate control system draws air
through the exterior vents at the
bottom of the windshield. Keep
these vents clear of leaves and other
debris.
For the climate control system to
provide heating and cooling, the
engine must be running.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
PASSENGER’S-SIDE VENT
Open
Close
Comfort and Convenience Features
115
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
3.2 CL without Navigation System
Fully-automatic Operation
To put the Automatic Climate
Control in fully-automatic mode,
press the AUTO button and set the
fan control dial to AUTO, then set
the desired temperature by turning
the temperature control dial. You will
see FULL AUTO in the system’s
display. The light in the
button also shows you which
mode, Recirculation or Fresh Air, is
selected.
The system automatically selects the
proper mix of conditioned and/or
heated air that will, as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior
temperature from its current level to
the set temperature.
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit (60°F/18°C) or its upper
limit (90°F/32°C), the system runs
at full cooling or heating only. It does
not regulate the interior temperature.
116
Comfort and Convenience Features
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
AUTO BUTTON
FULL AUTO DISPLAY
FAN CONTROL
DIAL
OFF BUTTON
When the temperature is set
between the lower and upper limits,
the system regulates the interior
temperature to the set value.
Pressing the OFF button shuts the
climate control system completely
off. Keep the system completely off
only for short periods. To keep stale
air and mustiness from collecting,
you should have the fan running at
all times.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
Semi-automatic Operation
You can manually select various
functions of the Climate Control
system when it is in FULL AUTO.
All other features remain automatically controlled. Making any
manual selection causes the word
FULL to go out.
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
AIR CONDITIONING BUTTON
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning on and off. You will see
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display.
When you turn the A/C off, the system cannot regulate the inside temperature if you set the dial below the
outside temperature. With the A/C
on, use the temperature control dial
to adjust the temperature of the air
flow to a comfortable setting.
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
Recirculation Button
This button controls the source of
the air going into the system. When
the indicator in this button is lit, air
from the car’s interior is sent
through the system again
(Recirculation mode). When the
indicator is off, air is brought in from
outside the car (Fresh Air mode).
You can, for example, manually put
the system in recirculation mode
when driving through an area of
smoke or fumes.
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
117
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
Fan Control Dial
You can manually select the fan
speed by turning the fan control dial.
When you turn the dial clockwise,
the fan is taken out of automatic
mode and starts to run at its lowest
speed. Turning the dial fully
clockwise increases the fan’s speed,
which increases air flow.
MODE BUTTON
FAN CONTROL DIAL
Mode Button
Use the MODE button to select the
vents the air flows from. Some air
will flow from the side vents and the
dashboard corner vents in all modes.
Each time you press the MODE
button, the display shows the mode
selected. Press the button four times
to see all the modes.
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
118
Comfort and Convenience Features
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
The main air flow is divided
between the floor vents and defroster vents at the base of the windshield.
The main air flow comes
from the floor vents.
The main air flow is divided
between the dashboard vents and
the floor vents.
The main air flow comes
from the dashboard vents.
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
119
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
The
button directs the main
air flow to the windshield for faster
defrosting. It also overrides any
MODE selection you may have made.
When you select
, the A/C
turns on automatically and the
system selects Fresh Air mode. If
the fan control dial is in AUTO, the
fan speed increases automatically. If
it is not in AUTO, manually increase
the fan speed or set the dial to
AUTO. You can increase air flow to
the windshield by closing the side
vents in the dashboard.
When you turn off
by
pressing the button again, the
system returns to its former settings.
Rear Window Defogger Button
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page 70 ).
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON
120
Comfort and Convenience Features
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
3.2 CL with Navigation System
Fully-automatic Operation
To put the Automatic Climate
Control in fully-automatic mode,
press the AUTO button. The
indicator in the button will light.
Then set the desired temperature by
pressing either side of the TEMP
button: ▲ to raise the temperature
above the displayed value, or ▼ to
lower the temperature. The light in
the
button also shows you
which mode, Recirculation or Fresh
Air, is selected.
The system automatically selects the
proper mix of conditioned and/or
heated air that will, as quickly as
possible, raise or lower the interior
temperature from its current level to
the set temperature.
When you set the temperature to its
lower limit (60°F/18°C) or its upper
limit (90°F/32°C), the system runs
at full cooling or heating only. It does
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
TEMPERATURE BUTTON
OFF BUTTON
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
not regulate the interior temperature.
When the temperature is set
between the lower and upper limits,
the system regulates the interior
temperature to the set value.
AUTO BUTTON
Pressing the OFF button shuts the
climate control system completely
off. Keep the system completely off
only for short periods. To keep stale
air and mustiness from collecting,
you should have the fan running at
all times.
Comfort and Convenience Features
121
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
Semi-automatic Operation
You can manually select various
functions of the Climate Control
system when it is in FULL AUTO.
All other features remain
automatically controlled. Some of
these functions appear in the
Navigation System display. Press the
A/C button next to the display to
show these functions. Making any
manual selection causes the
indicator in the AUTO button to go
out.
A/C ON/OFF ICONS
A/C BUTTON
A/C (Air Conditioning) On/Off Icons
Pressing ‘‘ON’’ or ‘‘OFF’’ in the
display turns the air conditioning on
and off. You will see A/C ON or A/C
OFF activated in the display.
122
Comfort and Convenience Features
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
When you turn the A/C off, the
system cannot regulate the inside
temperature if you set it below the
outside temperature. With the A/C
off, use the temperature buttons to
adjust the temperature of the air
flow to a comfortable setting.
TEMPERATURE BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
Recirculation Button
This button controls the source of
the air going into the system. When
the indicator in this button is lit, air
from the car’s interior is sent
through the system again
(Recirculation mode). When the
indicator is off, air is brought in from
outside the car (Fresh Air mode).
You can, for example, manually put
the system in recirculation mode
when driving through an area of
smoke or fumes.
MODE ICONS
Fan Control Icons
You can manually select the fan
speed by pressing any of the fan
control icons.
FAN CONTROL ICONS
Mode Icons
Use the MODE icons to select the
vents the air flows from. Some air
will flow from the dashboard corner
vents and the side vents in all modes.
RECIRCULATION BUTTON
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
123
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
The main air flow is divided
between the floor vents and defroster vents at the base of the windshield.
The main air flow comes
from the floor vents.
The main air flow is divided
between the dashboard vents and
the floor vents.
The main air flow comes
from the dashboard vents.
124
Comfort and Convenience Features
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
The
button directs the main
air flow to the windshield for faster
defrosting. It also overrides any
MODE selection you may have made.
When you select
, the A/C
turns on automatically, the system
selects Fresh Air mode, and the fan
speed increases. You can increase air
flow to the windshield by closing the
side vents in the dashboard.
When you turn off
by
pressing the button again, the
system returns to its former settings.
DEFROSTER BUTTON
Rear Window Defogger Button
This button turns the rear window
defogger on and off (see page 70 ).
REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON
Comfort and Convenience Features
125
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Climate Control System
Sunlight Sensor/Temperature
Sensor
SUNLIGHT SENSOR
The climate control system has two
sensors. A sunlight sensor is located
in the top of the dashboard and a
temperature sensor is next to the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
126
Comfort and Convenience Features
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
AM/FM/Cassette/CD Changer
Audio System
Your Acura’s audio system provides
clear reception on both AM and FM
bands, while the preset buttons allow
you to easily select your favorite
stations.
The cassette system features Dolby*
noise reduction, automatic sensing of
chromium-dioxide (CrO2) tape, and
autoreverse for continuous play.
*
Dolby noise reduction manufactured under
license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. ‘‘DOLBY’’ and the double-D symbol
are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories
Licensing Corporation.
The in-dash CD changer holds up to
six discs. You operate the CD
changer with the same controls used
for the radio. See page 139 for CD
changer operation.
The anti-theft feature will disable the
system if it is disconnected from the
car’s battery. To get the system
working again, you must enter a
code number (see page 149 ).
Comfort and Convenience Features
127
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Operating the Radio
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) to
operate the audio system. Turn the
system on by pressing the PWR/
VOL knob or the AM or FM button.
Adjust the volume by turning the
knob.
The band and frequency that the
radio was last tuned to is displayed.
To change bands, press the AM or
FM button. On the FM band, ST will
be displayed if the station is broadcasting in stereo. Stereo
reproduction on AM is not available.
128
Comfort and Convenience Features
You can use any of four methods to
find radio stations on the selected
band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN or the
Preset buttons.
TUNE − Use the TUNE knob to
tune the radio to a desired frequency.
Turn the TUNE knob to the right to
tune to a higher frequency, or to the
left to tune to a lower frequency.
Turn the knob right or left until the
display reaches the desired
frequency.
SEEK − The SEEK function
searches the band for a station with
a strong signal. To activate it, press
− or ○
+ ), then
either SEEK button (○
release it. Depending on which
SEEK button you press, the system
scans upward or downward from the
current frequency. It stops when it
finds a station with a strong signal.
SCAN − The SCAN function
samples all the stations with strong
signals on the selected band. To
activate it, press the SCAN button,
then release it. When the system is
in the SCAN mode, SCAN shows in
the display. The system will scan up
the band for a station with a strong
signal. When it finds one, it will stop
and play that station for
approximately five seconds. If you do
nothing, the system will then scan
for the next strong station and play
that for five seconds. When it plays a
station that you want to continue
listening to, press the SCAN button
again.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Preset − You can store the
frequencies of your favorite radio
stations in the six preset buttons.
Each button will store one frequency
on the AM band, and two
frequencies on the FM band.
PWR/VOL
KNOB
AM
BUTTON
FM
BUTTON
STEREO
INDICATOR
TUNE KNOB
To store a frequency:
1. Select the desired band, AM or
FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
two frequencies with each Preset
button.
2. Use the TUNE or SEEK function
to tune the radio to a desired
station.
3. Pick the Preset button you want
for that station. Press the button
and hold it until you hear a beep.
4. Repeat steps 1 to 3 to store a total
of six stations on AM and twelve
on FM.
SCAN BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
Once a station’s frequency is stored,
simply press and release the proper
Preset button to tune to it.
SEEK BUTTONS
The preset frequencies will be lost if
your car’s battery goes dead, is
disconnected, or the radio fuse is
removed.
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
129
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
AUTO SELECT − If you are
traveling far from home and can no
longer receive the stations you
preset, you can use the Auto Select
feature to find stations in the local
area.
To activate Auto Select, press the
A. SEL button. A. SEL will flash in
the display, and the system will go
into scan mode for several seconds.
It automatically scans both bands,
looking for stations with strong
signals. It stores the frequencies of
six AM stations and twelve FM
stations in the preset buttons. You
can then use the preset buttons to
select those stations.
If you are in a remote area, Auto
Select may not find six strong AM
stations or twelve strong FM stations.
If this happens, you will see a ‘‘0’’
displayed when you press any preset
button that does not have a station
stored.
130
Comfort and Convenience Features
A.SEL INDICATOR
SCAN BUTTON
A.SEL
BUTTON
PRESET
BUTTONS
If you do not like the stations Auto
Select has stored, you can store
other frequencies in the preset
buttons. Use the TUNE, SEEK, or
SCAN function to find the desired
frequencies, then store them in the
selected preset buttons as described
previously.
TUNE KNOB
SEEK BUTTONS
Auto Select does not erase the
frequencies that you preset previously. When you return home, turn
off Auto Select by pressing the
A. SEL button. The preset buttons
will then select the frequencies you
originally set.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Adjusting the Sound
Bass, Treble, Balance, and Fader are
each adjustable. You select which of
these you want to adjust by pressing
the TUNE knob. The mode changes
from BAS to TRE to FAD to BAL,
and then back to the selected audio
mode, each time you press the
TUNE knob.
LEVEL INDICATORS
TUNE KNOB
Treble/Bass − Use these modes to
adjust the tone to your liking. Select
TRE or BAS by pressing the TUNE
knob. Adjust the desired mode by
turning the TUNE knob. The level
indicators on the display show you
the range.
Balance/Fader − These two
modes adjust the strength of the
sound coming from each speaker.
BAL adjusts the side-to-side strength,
while FAD adjusts the front-to-back
strength.
Select BAL or FAD by pressing the
TUNE knob. Adjust the Balance or
Fader to your liking by turning the
TUNE knob. The level indicators on
the display show you the range.
The system will automatically return
the display to the selected audio
mode about five seconds after you
stop adjusting a mode with the
TUNE knob.
Comfort and Convenience Features
131
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Audio System Lighting
You can use the instrument panel
brightness control dial to adjust the illumination of the audio system (see
page 67 ). The audio system
illuminates when the parking lights
are on, even if the radio is turned off.
Stations must use these exact
frequencies. It is fairly common for
stations to round-off the frequency in
their advertising, so your radio could
display a frequency of 100.9 even
though the announcer may identify
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
Radio Frequencies
Your Acura’s radio can receive the
complete AM and FM bands.
Those bands cover these frequencies:
Radio Reception
How well your Acura’s radio receives
stations is dependent on many
factors, such as the distance from
the station’s transmitter, nearby
large objects, and atmospheric
conditions.
AM band:
530 to 1,710 kilohertz
FM band:
87.7 to 107.9 megahertz
Radio stations on the AM band are
assigned frequencies at least ten
kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).
Stations on the FM band are
assigned frequencies at least 0.2
megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).
132
Comfort and Convenience Features
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
as you get farther away from its
transmitter. If you are listening to an
AM station, you will notice the sound
volume becoming weaker, and the
station drifting in and out. If you are
listening to an FM station, you will
see the stereo indicator flickering off
and on as the signal weakens.
Eventually, the stereo indicator will
go off and the sound will fade
completely as you get out of range of
the station’s signal.
Driving very near the transmitter of
a station that is broadcasting on a
frequency close to the frequency of
the station you are listening to can
also affect your radio’s reception.
You may temporarily hear both
stations, or hear only the station you
are close to.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
As required by the FCC:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
Radio signals, especially on the FM
band, are deflected by large objects
such as buildings and hills. Your
radio then receives both the direct
signal from the station’s transmitter,
and the deflected signal. This causes
the sound to distort or flutter. This is
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving.
Radio reception can be affected by
atmospheric conditions such as
thunderstorms, high humidity, and
even sunspots. You may be able to
receive a distant radio station one
day and not receive it the next day
because of a change in conditions.
Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
Comfort and Convenience Features
133
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Operating the Cassette Player
The ignition switch must be in
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).
Make sure the tape opening on the
cassette is facing to the right, then
insert the cassette most of the way
into the slot. The system will pull it
in the rest of the way, and begin to
play.
The tape direction indicator will light
to show you which side of the
cassette is playing. The ▲ indicates
the side you inserted facing upward
is now playing. If you want to play
the other side, press the PROG
button.
Dolby noise reduction turns on when
you insert a cassette. The
indicator will light in the display. If the
tape was not recorded with Dolby
noise reduction, turn it off by
pressing the
button.
Noise reduction remains off until you
turn it on by pressing the button
again.
When the system reaches the end of
the tape, it will automatically reverse
direction and play the other side. If
you want to remove the cassette
from the drive, press the EJECT
button.
You can remove the cassette with
the ignition switch in any position,
even if the audio system is turned off.
134
Comfort and Convenience Features
If you turn the system off while a
tape is playing, either with the PWR/
VOL knob or by turning off the
ignition, the cassette will remain in
the drive. When you turn the system
back on, the tape will begin playing
where it left off.
To switch to the radio or CD
changer while listening to a tape,
press the AM, FM or CD button. To
change back to the cassette player,
press the TAPE button.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Tape Search Functions
With a cassette playing, you can use
the FF, REW, SKIP, or REPEAT
function to find a desired program.
FF/REW − Fast Forward and
Rewind move the tape rapidly. To
rewind the tape, push the REW
button. You will see REW in the
display. To fast forward the tape,
push the FF button. You will see FF
displayed. Press the FF, REW or
PLAY button to take the system out
of rewind or fast forward. When the
system reaches the end of the tape,
it reverses direction and begins to
play.
PWR/VOL KNOB
TAPE DIRECTION
INDICATOR
DOLBY INDICATOR
CASSETTE SLOT
TAPE EJECT
BUTTON
TAPE
BUTTON
AM BUTTON
PLAY
BUTTON
DOLBY BUTTON
CD BUTTON
PROG
BUTTON
FM BUTTON
FF BUTTON
REW BUTTON
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
135
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
SKIP − The SKIP function allows
you to find the beginning of a song
or passage. To skip to the beginning
of a song or passage currently
− button. You will
playing, push the ○
see REW flashing in the display as
the tape rewinds. To skip to the
beginning of the next song, push the
+ button. You will see FF flashing in
○
the display as the tape fast forwards.
When the system finds the beginning of a song or passage, it goes
back to PLAY.
REPEAT INDICATOR
To stop the SKIP function before it
finds the beginning of a song or
passage, press either of the SKIP
− or ○
+ ).
buttons (○
RPT BUTTON
FF BUTTON
REW BUTTON
136
Comfort and Convenience Features
SKIP BUTTONS
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
REPEAT − The Repeat function
continuously replays the current
song or passage. Press the RPT
button to activate it; you will see RPT
displayed as a reminder. When the
system reaches the end of the song
or passage currently playing, it will
automatically go into rewind. When
it senses the beginning of the same
song or passage, the system returns
to PLAY mode. It will continue to
repeat this same program until you
deactivate REPEAT by pressing the
button again.
Pressing the REW or FF button, or
either of the SKIP buttons, also turns
off REPEAT.
The SKIP and REPEAT functions
use silent periods on the tape to find
the end of a song or passage. These
features may not work to your
satisfaction if there is almost no gap
between selections, a high noise
level between selections, or a silent
period in the middle of a selection.
Comfort and Convenience Features
137
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Caring for the Cassette Player
The cassette player picks up dirt and
oxides from the tape. This contamination builds up over time and
causes the sound quality to degrade.
To prevent this, you should clean the
player after every 30 hours of use.
Your dealer has a cleaning kit
available.
Look at the cassette before you
insert it. If the tape is loose, tighten
it by turning a hub with a pencil or
your finger.
If the label is peeling off, remove it
from the cassette or it could cause
the cassette to jam in the player.
Never try to insert a warped or
damaged cassette in the player.
If you do not clean the cassette
player regularly, it may eventually
become impossible to remove the
contamination with a normal
cleaning kit.
When they are not in use, store
cassettes in their cases to protect
them from dust and moisture. Never
place cassettes where they will be
exposed to direct sunlight, high heat,
or high humidity. If a cassette is
exposed to extreme heat or cold, let
it reach a moderate temperature
before inserting it in the player.
Use 100-minute or shorter cassettes.
Cassettes longer than that use
thinner tape that may break or jam
the drive.
Never try to insert foreign objects
into the cassette player.
138
Comfort and Convenience Features
If you see the error indication
‘‘
’’ on the display, press the
EJECT button to remove the
cassette from the unit. Make sure
the tape is not damaged. If the
cassette will not eject or the error
indication stays on after the cassette
ejects, take the car to your Acura
dealer.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Operating the CD Changer
Your Acura’s audio system has an indash CD changer that holds up to six
discs, providing several hours of
continuous entertainment. You
operate this CD changer with the
same controls used for the radio and
cassette player.
LOAD BUTTON
CD EJECT BUTTON
CD SLOT
To load the CDs or operate the CD
changer, the ignition switch must be
in ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II).
Load and play only standard round
discs. Odd-shaped CDs may jam in
the drive or cause other problems.
You cannot load and play 3-inch
(8-cm) discs in this system.
For best results when using CD-R
discs, use only high quality discs
labeled for audio use. When
recording a CD-R, the recording
must be closed in order for the disc
to be used by CD players. CD-RW
discs will not work in this unit.
PWR/VOL
KNOB
RDM BUTTON
CD BUTTON
SKIP BUTTONS
REPEAT BUTTON
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
139
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Loading CDs in the Changer
To load multiple CDs in one
operation:
1. Press and hold the Load button
until you hear a beep and see
‘‘_ _ _ _’’ in the display, then
release the button.
2. On the left side of the display, the
CD Loaded indicator for an empty
position will begin blinking.
3. When you see LOAd in the display,
insert the disc into the CD slot.
Insert it only about halfway, the
drive will pull it in the rest of the
way. You will again see the dashes
in the display as the CD is loaded.
4. When LOAd appears again in the
display, insert the next disc into
the CD slot.
140
Comfort and Convenience Features
5. Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. The system will then
begin playing the last CD loaded.
If you are not loading CDs into all six
positions, press the Load button
again after the last CD has loaded.
The system will begin playing the
last CD loaded.
If you stop loading CDs before all six
positions are filled, and you do not
press the Load button, the system
will wait for ten seconds, then stop
the load operation and begin playing
the last CD loaded.
To load a single CD:
1. Press and release the Load button.
2. When the CD Loaded indicator for
an empty position starts to blink,
and you see LOAd in the display,
insert the disc into the CD slot.
Insert it only about halfway, the
drive will pull it in the rest of the
way.
3. The system will load the CD, and
begin playing it.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
If you press the Load button while a
CD is playing, the system will stop
playing that CD and start the loading
sequence. It will then play the CD
just loaded.
LOAD BUTTON
CD LOADED
INDICATOR
FM
BUTTON
CD SLOT
You can also load a CD into an empty
position while a CD is playing by
pressing the appropriate preset
button. Select an empty position (the
CD Loaded indicator is off), and
press the preset button for that
position (1 to 6). The system will
stop playing the current CD and start
the loading sequence. It will then
play the CD just loaded.
AM BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
TAPE BUTTON
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
141
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Operation
Select the CD changer by pressing
the CD button. You will see ‘‘Cd’’ in
the display. The system will begin
playing the last selected disc in the
CD changer. You will see the disc
and track numbers displayed.
When that disc ends, the next disc in
the CD changer is loaded and played.
After the last disc finishes, the
system returns to disc 1.
To select a different disc, press the
appropriate Preset button (1 − 6). If
you select an empty position in the
CD changer, the system will go into
the loading sequence (see page 140 ).
You can use the SKIP buttons while
a disc is playing to select passages
and change tracks.
142
Comfort and Convenience Features
To move rapidly within a track, press
and hold the appropriate SKIP
button. You will hear a beep and the
system will continue to move. Press
+ button to move forward, or
the ○
− button to move backward.
the ○
Release the button when the system
reaches the point you want.
+ button
Each time you press the ○
and release it, the system skips
forward to the beginning of the next
−
track. Press and release the ○
button to skip backward to the
beginning of the current track. Press
and release it again to skip to the
beginning of the previous track.
REPEAT − To activate the Repeat
feature, press and release the RPT
button. You will see RPT in the
display as a reminder. The system
continuously replays the current
track. Press the RPT button again to
turn it off. Pressing either of the
SKIP buttons also turns off the
repeat feature.
RANDOM PLAY − This feature,
when activated, plays the tracks
within a CD in random order, rather
than in the order they are recorded
on the CD. To activate Random Play,
press the RDM button. You will see
RDM in the display. The system will
then select and play tracks randomly.
This continues until you deactivate
Random Play by pressing the RDM
button again, or you select a
different CD with a preset button.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
To take the system out of CD mode,
press the AM or FM button, or insert
a cassette in the player. If a tape is
already in the cassette player, press
the TAPE button. When you return
to CD mode by pressing the CD
button, play will continue at the same
point that it left off.
PWR/VOL
KNOB
AM BUTTON
FM BUTTON
RPT
INDICATOR
RDM
INDICATOR
CD
BUTTON
If you turn the system off while a CD
is playing, either with the PWR/VOL
knob or the ignition switch, play will
continue at the same point when you
turn it back on.
TAPE
BUTTON
RPT BUTTON
RDM
BUTTON
PRESET BUTTONS
SKIP BUTTONS
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
143
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Removing CDs from the Changer
To remove the disc that is currently
playing, press the Eject button. You
will see ‘‘EJEC’’ in the display. When
you remove the disc from the slot,
the system automatically begins the
Load sequence so you can load
another CD in that position. If you do
not load another CD, after ten
seconds the system begins playing
the next disc in the changer. If the
changer is empty, the system selects
the previous mode (AM, FM, or
Tape).
CD EJECT BUTTON
CD SLOT
If you do not remove the disc from
the slot, the system will reload the
disc after ten seconds and begin
playing it.
To remove a different CD from the
changer, first select it with the
appropriate preset button. When that
CD begins playing, press the Eject
button.
144
Comfort and Convenience Features
CD BUTTON
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
If you press the Eject button while
listening to the radio or tape, or with
the audio system turned off, the disc
that was last selected is ejected.
After that disc is ejected, pressing
the Eject button again will eject the
next disc in the numerical order. By
doing this six times, you can remove
all the CDs from the changer.
In any mode, if you press the Eject
button and hold it until you hear a
beep, the system will eject all of the
discs in the changer.
You can also eject discs when the
ignition switch is off. The disc that
was last selected is ejected first. You
can eject all six discs, one at a time.
Comfort and Convenience Features
145
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Protecting Compact Discs
Handle a CD by its edges; never
touch either surface. Do not place
stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
These and contamination from
fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip pens
can cause the CD to not play
properly, or possibly jam in the drive.
When a CD is not being played, store
it in its case to protect it from dust
and other contamination. To prevent
warpage, keep CDs out of direct
sunlight and extreme heat.
To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.
Wipe across the disc from the center
to the outside edge.
A new CD may be rough on the
inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness
can flake off and fall on the recording surface of the disc, causing
skipping or other problems. Remove
these pieces by rubbing the inner
and outer edges with the side of a
pencil or pen.
Never try to insert foreign objects in
the CD player or the magazine.
146
Comfort and Convenience Features
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
CD Changer Error Indications
If you see an error indication in the
display while operating the CD
changer, find the cause in the chart
to the right. If you cannot clear the
error indication, take the car to your
Acura dealer.
Indication
Cause
Solution
Disc-changer
malfunction.
Consult your Acura dealer.
High temperature.
Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
Comfort and Convenience Features
147
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Remote Audio Controls
AUDIO/CH
BUTTON
The top and bottom buttons adjust
the volume up (▲) or down (▼).
Press the proper button and hold it
until the desired volume is reached,
then release it.
The AUDIO/CH button has three
functions, depending on whether you
are listening to the radio, or playing a
cassette or CD.
Two controls for the audio system
are mounted in the steering wheel
hub. These let you control basic
functions without removing your
hand from the wheel.
148
Comfort and Convenience Features
If you are listening to the radio, use
the AUDIO/CH button to change
stations. Each time you press this
button, the system advances to the
next preset station on the band you
are listening to. You will see the
number of the selected Preset button
in the display. To change bands,
press the AM or FM button on the
audio system’s front panel.
If you are playing a cassette, use the
AUDIO/CH button to advance to the
next selection. You will see ‘‘FF’’
blinking in the display when you
press the AUDIO/CH button. The
system fast forwards until it senses a
silent period, then goes back to
PLAY.
If you are playing a CD, the system
skips to the beginning of the next
track each time you push the
AUDIO/CH button. You will see the
disc and track number in the display.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Audio System
Theft Protection
Your car’s audio system will disable
itself if it is disconnected from
electrical power for any reason. To
make it work again, the user must
enter a specific five-digit code in the
Preset buttons. Because there are
hundreds of number combinations
possible from five digits, making the
system work without knowing the
exact code is nearly impossible.
You should have received a card that
lists your audio system’s code
number and serial number. It is best
to store this card in a safe place at
home. In addition, you should write
the audio system’s serial number in
this Owner’s Manual. If you should
happen to lose the card, you must
obtain the code number from your
Acura dealer. To do this, you will
need the system’s serial number.
If your car’s battery is disconnected
or goes dead, or the radio fuse is
removed, the audio system will
disable itself. If this happens, you
will see ‘‘
’’ in the frequency
display the next time you turn on the
system. Use the Preset buttons to
enter the five-digit code. If it is
entered correctly, the radio will start
playing.
You will have to store your favorite
stations in the Preset buttons after
the system begins working. Your
original settings were lost when
power was disconnected.
If you make a mistake entering the
code, do not start over or try to
correct your mistake. Complete the
five-digit sequence, then enter the
correct code. You have ten tries to
enter the correct code. If you are
unsuccessful in ten attempts, you
must then leave the system on for
one hour before trying again.
Comfort and Convenience Features
149
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Security System
The security system helps to protect
your car and valuables from theft.
The horn sounds and a combination
of headlights, parking lights, side
marker lights and taillights flashes if
someone attempts to break into your
car or remove the radio. This alarm
continues for two minutes, then the
system resets. To reset an alarming
system before the two minutes have
elapsed, unlock either door with the
key or the remote transmitter.
The security system sets automatically fifteen seconds after you
lock the doors, hood, and trunk. For
the system to activate, you must lock
the doors from the outside with the
key, lock tab, door lock switch, or
remote transmitter. The security
system light on the driver’s door
starts blinking immediately to show
you the system is setting itself.
150
Comfort and Convenience Features
SECURITY SYSTEM LIGHT
Once the security system is set,
opening either door (without using
the key or the remote transmitter),
or the hood, will cause it to alarm. It
also alarms if the radio is removed
from the dashboard or the wiring is
cut.
With the system set, you can still
open the trunk with the remote
transmitter without triggering the
alarm. The alarm will sound if the
trunk lock is forced, or the trunk is
opened with the trunk release button
on the driver’s door, the trunk
release handle behind the trunk
pass-through cover, or the
emergency trunk opener.
The security system will not set if
the hood, trunk, or either door is not
fully closed. If the system will not set,
check the Door and Trunk Open
Monitor on the instrument panel
(see page 58 ), to see if the doors
and trunk are fully closed. Since it is
not part of the monitor display,
manually check the hood.
Do not attempt to alter this system
or add other devices to it.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Cruise Control
Cruise control allows you to maintain
a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)
without keeping your foot on the
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
conditions such as city driving,
winding roads, slippery roads, heavy
rain, or bad weather. You should
have full control of the car under
those conditions.
Using the Cruise Control
Improper use of the cruise
control can lead to a crash.
Use the cruise control only
when traveling on open
highways in good weather.
CRUISE CONTROL MASTER SWITCH
1. Push in the Cruise Control Master
Switch to the left of the steering
column. The indicator in the
switch will light.
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
151
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Cruise Control
RESUME/
accel
The cruise control may not hold the
set speed when you are going up and
down hills. If your speed increases
going down a hill, use the brakes to
slow down to the desired speed. This
will cancel the cruise control. To
resume the set speed, press the
RESUME/accel button. The
CRUISE CONTROL light on the
instrument panel comes on.
CANCEL
SET/decel
3. Press and release the SET/decel
button on the steering wheel. The
CRUISE CONTROL light on the
instrument panel comes on to
show the system is now activated.
152
Comfort and Convenience Features
When climbing a steep hill, the
automatic transmission may
downshift to hold the set speed.
Changing the Set Speed
You can increase the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the RESUME/
accel button. The car will accelerate. When you reach the desired
cruising speed, release the button.
To increase your speed in very
small amounts, tap the RESUME/
accel button repeatedly. Each time
you do this, your car will speed up
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Push on the accelerator pedal. Accelerate to the desired cruising
speed and press the SET/decel
button.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Cruise Control
You can decrease the set cruising
speed in any of these ways:
Press and hold the SET/decel
button. The car will decelerate.
Release the button when you
reach the desired speed.
To slow down in very small
amounts, tap the SET/decel
button repeatedly. Each time you
do this, your car will slow down
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
Tap the brake pedal lightly with
your foot. The CRUISE
CONTROL light on the
instrument panel will go out.
When the car slows to the desired
speed, press the SET/decel button.
The car will then maintain the
desired speed.
Even with the cruise control turned
on, you can still use the accelerator
pedal to speed up for passing. After
completing the pass, take your foot
off the accelerator pedal. The car
will return to the set cruising speed.
Cancelling the Cruise Control
Resting your foot on the brake pedal
will cause the cruise control to
cancel.
CANCEL BUTTON
You can cancel the cruise control in
any of these ways:
Tap the brake pedal.
Push the CANCEL button on the
steering wheel.
Press the Cruise Control Master
Switch.
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
153
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Cruise Control
When you push the CANCEL button,
or tap the brake pedal, the CRUISE
CONTROL light on the instrument
panel will go out and the car will
begin to slow down. You can use the
accelerator pedal in the normal way.
The system remembers the
previously-set cruising speed. To
return to that speed, accelerate to
above 25 mph (40 km/h), then press
and release the RESUME/accel
button. The CRUISE CONTROL
light comes on, and the car will
accelerate to the same cruising
speed as before.
154
Comfort and Convenience Features
Pressing the Cruise Control Master
Switch turns the system completely
off and erases the previous cruising
speed from memory. To use the
system again, refer to Using the
Cruise Control.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
The HomeLink Universal
Transceiver built into your car can
be programmed to operate remotelycontrolled devices around your home,
such as garage doors, lighting, or
home security systems. It can
replace up to three remote
transmitters.
Customer Assistance
If you have problems with training
the HomeLink Universal Transceiver,
or would like information on home
products that can be operated by the
transmitter, call (800) 355-3515. On
the Internet, go to www.homelink.
com.
Important Safety Precautions
Always refer to the operating
instructions and safety information
that came with your garage door
opener or other equipment you
intend to operate with the HomeLink
Universal Transceiver. If you do not
have this information, you should
contact the manufacturer of the
equipment.
While training or using HomeLink,
make sure you have a clear view of
the garage door or gate, and that no
one will be injured by its movement.
HomeLink stores the code in a
permanent memory. There should
be no need to retrain HomeLink if
your car’s battery goes dead or is
disconnected.
If your garage door opener was
manufactured before April 1982, you
may not be able to program
HomeLink to operate it. Garage door
openers manufactured before that
date do not have a safety feature that
causes them to stop and reverse if an
obstacle is detected during closing,
increasing the risk of injury. If you
have questions, call (800) 355-3515.
General Information
If you are training HomeLink to
operate a garage door or gate, it is
recommended that you unplug the
motor for that device during training.
Repeatedly pressing the remote
control button could burn out the
motor.
Comfort and Convenience Features
155
Main Menu
Table of Contents
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Training HomeLink
Before you can use HomeLink to
operate devices around your home, it
must ‘‘learn’’ the proper codes. For
example, to train HomeLink to open
and close the garage door:
Before you begin − If you just took
delivery of your vehicle and have not
trained any of the buttons in
HomeLink before, you should erase
any previously learned codes before
training the first button. To do this,
press and hold the two outside
buttons on the HomeLink
transceiver for about 20 seconds,
until the red light flashes. Release
the buttons, then proceed to Step 1.
If you are training the second or
third buttons, go directly to Step 1.
1. Unplug the garage door opener
motor from the house current.
2. Hold the end of the garage door
opener remote control 2 to 5
inches from HomeLink. Make
sure you are not blocking your
view of the red light in HomeLink.
156
Comfort and Convenience Features
3. Select the HomeLink button you
want to train.
4. Press the button on the remote
control and the button on
HomeLink at the same time. Hold
down both buttons.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Canadian Owners:
The remote control you are training
from may stop transmitting after two
seconds. This is not long enough for
HomeLink to learn the code. Release
and press the button on the remote
control every two seconds until
HomeLink has learned the code.
5. The red light in HomeLink should
begin flashing. It will flash slowly
at first, then rapidly.
6. When the red light flashes rapidly,
release both buttons. HomeLink
should have learned the code from
the remote control.
variable or rolling code garage
door opener. Test this by pressing
and holding the HomeLink
transceiver button you just trained.
If the red light blinks for two
seconds, then stays on, you have a
rolling code garage door opener.
You may be able to verify this with
the manufacturer’s documentation.
Go to ‘‘Training With a Rolling
Code System.’’
8. Repeat these steps to train the
other two HomeLink buttons to
operate any other remotelycontrolled devices around your
home (lighting, automatic gate,
security system, etc.).
Training With a Rolling Code
System
For security purposes, newer garage
door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’
or variable code. Information from
the remote control and the garage
door opener are needed before
HomeLink can operate the garage
door opener.
The‘‘Training HomeLink’’ procedure
trains HomeLink to the proper
garage door opener code. The
following procedure synchronizes
HomeLink to the garage door opener
so they send and receive the correct
codes.
7. Plug in the garage door opener
motor, then test the HomeLink
transceiver button by pushing it. It
should operate the garage door.
If the button does not work, repeat
this procedure to train it again. If it
still does not work, you may have a
CONTINUED
Comfort and Convenience Features
157
Main Menu
Table of Contents
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
It may be helpful to have someone
assist you with this procedure.
TRAINING BUTTON
1. Make sure you have properly
completed the ‘‘Training
HomeLink’’ procedure.
5. Press and release the HomeLink
button again. This should turn off
the training light on the garage
door opener unit. (Some systems
may require you to press and
release the button up to three
times.)
2. Find the ‘‘Training’’ button on your
garage door opener unit. The
location will vary, depending on
the manufacturer. The
manufacturer’s documentation
may help.
3. Press the Training button on the
garage door opener unit until the
light next to the button comes on,
then release it. The light may blink,
or come on and stay on. You then
have approximately 30 seconds to
complete the following steps.
158
Comfort and Convenience Features
4. Press and release the button on
HomeLink. (The same button you
trained with the ‘‘Training
HomeLink’’ procedure.)
6. Press the HomeLink button again.
It should operate the garage door.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
Retraining a Button
To train an already programmed
HomeLink button to operate a new
device:
1. Select the HomeLink button you
want to train.
2. Press and hold the HomeLink
button until the red light begins to
flash slowly (approximately 20
seconds).
3. While continuing to hold the
HomeLink button, place the
remote control for the device 2 to
5 inches from HomeLink.
4. Press and hold the button on the
remote control. Hold both buttons
until the red light begins to flash
rapidly.
5. Release both buttons. HomeLink
should now be trained to operate
the device.
Erasing Codes
To erase the codes stored in all three
buttons, press and hold the two
outside buttons until the red light
begins to flash, then release the
buttons.
You should erase all three codes
before selling the car.
As required by the FCC:
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry
Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
Comfort and Convenience Features
159
Main Menu
160
Main Menu
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your Acura,
you should know what gasoline to
use, and how to check the levels of
important fluids. You also need to
know how to properly store luggage
or packages. The information in this
section will help you. If you plan to
add any accessories to your car,
please read the information in this
section first.
Break-in Period .............................. 162
Gasoline .......................................... 162
Service Station Procedures .......... 163
Filling the Fuel Tank ................. 163
Opening the Hood ..................... 164
Oil Check ................................ 165
Engine Coolant Check .......... 167
Fuel Economy ................................ 168
Car Condition ............................. 168
Driving Habits ............................ 168
Accessories and Modifications .... 169
Carrying Cargo .............................. 171
Before Driving
161
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Break-in Period, Gasoline
Break-in Period
Help assure your car’s future
reliability and performance by paying
extra attention to how you drive
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km).
During this period:
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid
acceleration.
Avoid hard braking. New brakes
need to be broken-in by moderate
use for the first 200 miles (300
km).
Do not change the oil until the
recommended time or mileage
interval shown in the maintenance
schedule.
You should follow these same recommendations with an overhauled
or exchanged engine, or when the
brakes are relined.
162
Before Driving
Gasoline
Your Acura is designed to operate on
premium unleaded gasoline with a
pump octane number of 91 or higher.
Use of a lower octane gasoline can
cause occasional metallic knocking
noises in the engine and will result in
decreased engine performance.
We recommend gasolines containing
detergent additives that help prevent
fuel system and engine deposits.
Using gasoline containing lead will
damage your car’s emissions
controls. This contributes to air
pollution.
In Canada, some gasolines contain
an octane-enhancing additive called
MMT. If you use such gasolines,
your emissions control system
performance may deteriorate and
the Malfunction Indicator Lamp on
your instrument panel may turn on.
If this happens, contact your
authorized Acura dealer for service.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Service Station Procedures
Filling the Fuel Tank
Pull
Gasoline is highly flammable
and explosive. You can be
burned or seriously injured
when handling fuel.
Stop the engine and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away.
Handle fuel only outdoors.
Wipe up spills immediately.
FUEL FILL CAP
1. Because the fuel fill cap is on the
driver’s side of the car, park with
that side closest to the service
station pumps.
2. Open the fuel fill door by pulling
on the handle to the left of the
driver’s seat.
3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.
You may hear a hissing sound as
pressure inside the tank escapes.
Place the cap in the holder on the
fuel fill door.
4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel
nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank, leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
Your car has an on-board refueling
vapor recovery system to help
keep fuel vapors from going into
the atmosphere. If the fuel nozzle
keeps clicking off even though the
tank is not full, there may be a
problem with this system. Consult
your dealer.
CONTINUED
Before Driving
163
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Service Station Procedures
5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on,
tighten it until it clicks several
times. If you do not properly
tighten the cap, the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp may come on (see
page 290 ).
Opening the Hood
HOOD RELEASE HANDLE
6. Push the fuel fill door closed until
it latches.
LATCH HANDLE
1. Shift to Park or Neutral and set
the parking brake. Pull the hood
release handle located under the
lower left corner of the dashboard.
The hood will pop up slightly.
164
Before Driving
2. Standing in front of the car, reach
in between the hood and the front
bumper with your finger. The
hood latch handle is under the ‘‘A’’
logo. Slide the latch handle to the
right.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Service Station Procedures
If you can open the hood without
sliding the hood latch handle, or the
hood latch handle moves stiffly or
does not spring back as before, the
mechanism should be cleaned and
lubricated (see page 233 ).
Oil Check
DIPSTICK
3. Lift the hood up most of the way.
The hydraulic supports will lift it
up the rest of the way and hold it
up.
Check the engine oil level every time
you fill the car with fuel. Wait a few
minutes after turning the engine off
before you check the oil.
To close the hood, lower it to about a
foot (30 cm) above the fender, then
press down firmly with your hands.
After closing the hood, make sure it
is securely latched.
1. Remove the dipstick (orange
handle).
CONTINUED
Before Driving
165
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Service Station Procedures
DIPSTICK
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean
cloth or paper towel.
3. Insert it all the way back in its tube.
4. Remove the dipstick again and
check the level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
If it is near or below the lower mark,
see Adding Oil on page 219 .
166
Before Driving
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Service Station Procedures
Engine Coolant Check
RESERVE TANK
MAX
Refer to Owner Maintenance
Checks on page 217 for information
on checking other items in your
Acura.
MIN
Look at the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the MAX and MIN lines. If
it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 223 for
information on adding the proper
coolant.
Before Driving
167
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fuel Economy
The condition of your car and your
driving habits are the two most
important things that affect the fuel
mileage you get.
Car Condition
Always maintain your car according
to the maintenance schedule. This
will keep it in top operating condition.
An important part of that maintenance is the Owner Maintenance
Checks (see page 217 ). For
example, an underinflated tire
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’
which uses fuel. It also wears out
faster, so check the tire pressure at
least monthly.
In winter, the build-up of snow on
your car’s underside adds weight and
rolling resistance. Frequent cleaning
helps your fuel mileage and reduces
the chance of corrosion.
168
Before Driving
Driving Habits
You can improve fuel economy by
driving moderately. Rapid acceleration, abrupt cornering, and hard
braking use more fuel.
Always drive in the highest gear that
allows the engine to run and accelerate smoothly.
Depending on traffic conditions, try
to maintain a constant speed. Every
time you slow down and speed up,
your car uses extra fuel. Use the
cruise control, when appropriate, to
increase fuel economy.
A cold engine uses more fuel than a
warm engine. It is not necessary to
‘‘warm-up’’ a cold engine by letting it
idle for a long time. You can drive
away in about a minute, no matter
how cold it is outside. The engine
will warm up faster, and you get
better fuel economy. To cut down on
the number of ‘‘cold starts,’’ try to
combine several short trips into one.
The air conditioning puts an extra
load on the engine which makes it
use more fuel. Turn off the A/C or
set the climate control to a higher
temperature to cut down on air
conditioning use. Use the flowthrough ventilation when the outside
air temperature is moderate.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your car, or installing
some non-Acura accessories, can
make your car unsafe. Before you
make any modifications or add any
accessories, be sure to read the
following information.
Accessories
Your dealer has Genuine Acura
accessories that allow you to
personalize your car. These
accessories have been designed and
approved for your car, and are
covered by warranty.
Non-Acura accessories are usually
designed for universal applications.
Although aftermarket accessories
may fit on your car, they may not
meet factory specifications, and
could adversely affect your car’s
handling and stability. (See
‘‘Modifications’’ on page 170 for
additional information.)
Improper accessories or
modifications can affect your
car’s handling, stability and
performance, and cause a
crash in which you can be hurt
or killed.
However, if electronic accessories
are improperly installed, or exceed
your car’s electrical system capacity,
they can interfere with the operation
of your car, or even cause the
airbags to deploy.
Before installing any accessory:
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding
accessories and modifications.
Make sure the accessory does not
obscure any lights, or interfere
with proper car operation or
performance.
When properly installed, cellular
phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
low-powered audio systems should
not interfere with your car’s
computer-controlled systems, such
as the SRS and anti-lock brake
system.
Be sure electronic accessories do
not overload electrical circuits
(see page 294 ).
Have the installer contact your
Acura dealer for assistance before
installing any electronic accessory.
If possible, have your dealer inspect
the final installation.
Before Driving
169
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Accessories and Modifications
Modifications
Do not remove any original
equipment or modify your car in any
way that would alter its design or
operation. This could make your car
unsafe and illegal to drive.
Do not modify your steering wheel
or any other part of your
Supplemental Restraint System.
Modifications could make the
system ineffective.
Do not attach hard objects on or
near a door. If a side airbag
inflates, a cup holder or other hard
object attached on or near the
door could be propelled inside the
car and hurt someone.
Additional Safety Precautions
For example, do not make any
modifications that would change the
ride height of your car, or install
wheels and tires with a different
overall diameter.
Such modifications can adversely
affect handling, and interfere with
the operation of the car’s anti-lock
brakes and other systems.
In addition, any modifications that
decrease ground clearance increase
the chance of undercarriage parts
striking a curb, speed bump, or other
raised object, which could cause
your airbags to deploy.
170
Before Driving
Do not attach or place objects on
the front airbag covers. Any object
Do not place any objects over the
outside edge of a front seat-back.
attached to or placed on the covers
marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG,’’ in the
center of the steering wheel and
on top of the dashboard, could
interfere with the proper operation
of the airbags. Or, if the airbags
inflate, the objects could be
propelled inside the car and hurt
someone.
Covering the outside edge of a
front seat-back, with a non-Acura
seat cover for example, could
prevent the airbag from inflating
properly.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Carrying Cargo
CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
DOOR POCKET
STORAGE TRAY*
Your car has several convenient
storage areas so you can stow cargo
safely.
The glove box, and the pockets in
the doors and seat-backs, are
designed for small, lightweight items.
The trunk is intended for larger,
heavier items.
In addition, the trunk pass-through
allows you to carry longer items.
REAR CONSOLE
COMPARTMENT
However, carrying too much cargo,
or improperly storing it, can affect
your car’s handling, stability, and
operation and make it unsafe. Before
carrying any type of cargo, be sure to
read the following pages.
SEAT-BACK POCKETS
TRUNK
CONSOLE POCKET
GLOVE BOX
* : 3.2 CL without Navigation System
Before Driving
171
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Carrying Cargo
Load Limit
The maximum load for your car is
700 lbs (325 kg).
This figure includes the total weight
of all occupants, cargo, accessories,
and the tongue weight if you are
towing a trailer.
To figure out how much cargo you
can carry:
Add up the weight of all occupants.
If you are towing a trailer, add the
tongue weight to the number
above.
Subtract the total from 700 lbs
(325 kg).
The final number is the total weight
of cargo you can carry.
172
Before Driving
Overloading or improper
loading can affect handling and
stability and cause a crash in
which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other
loading guidelines in this
manual.
Carrying Items in the Passenger
Compartment
Store or secure all items that could
be thrown around and hurt
someone during a crash.
Do not put any items on top of the
rear shelf. They can block your
view and be thrown around the car
during a crash.
Be sure items placed on the floor
behind the front seats cannot roll
under the seats and interfere with
the driver’s ability to operate the
pedals, or with the proper
operation of the seats.
Keep the glove box closed while
driving. If the lid is open, a
passenger could injure their knees
during a crash or sudden stop.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Carrying Cargo
Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or on
a Roof Rack
Distribute cargo evenly on the
floor of the trunk, placing the
heaviest items on the bottom and
as far forward as possible.
If you carry large items that
prevent you from closing the trunk
lid, exhaust gas can enter the
passenger area. To avoid the
possibility of carbon monoxide
poisoning, follow the instructions
on page 49 .
If you can carry any items on a
roof rack, be sure the total weight
of the rack and the items does not
exceed the maximum allowable
weight. Please contact your Acura
dealer for further information.
Cargo Net
CARGO NET
TRUNK NET HOOK
The cargo net can be used to help
hold down items stored in the trunk.
To use the cargo net, hook it to the
buttons on the floor and sides of the
trunk. You can use the cargo net in
several configurations by hooking it
to different buttons.
When you are not using the cargo
net, store it in the pocket in the left
side of the trunk.
Before Driving
173
Main Menu
174
Main Menu
Driving
This section gives you tips on
starting the engine under various
conditions, and how to operate the
automatic transmission. It also
includes important information on
parking your car, the braking system,
the Traction Control System, the
Vehicle Stability Assist System, and
facts you need if you are planning to
tow a trailer.
Preparing to Drive ......................... 176
Starting the Engine........................ 177
Starting in Cold Weather
at High Altitude ..................... 177
Automatic Transmission............... 178
Shift Lever Position Indicator .. 178
Shift Lever Positions ................. 179
Engine Speed Limiter ............... 184
Shift Lock Release ..................... 185
Parking ............................................ 186
The Braking System...................... 187
Brake Wear Indicators .............. 187
Brake System Design................ 188
Anti-lock Brakes ........................ 188
Important Safety
Reminders .......................... 189
ABS Indicator ......................... 189
Traction Control System............... 190
Vehicle Stability Assist System .... 193
Driving in Bad Weather ................ 196
Towing a Trailer ............................ 198
Driving
175
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Preparing to Drive
You should do the following checks
and adjustments every day before
you drive your car.
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors,
and outside lights are clean and
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice.
2. Check that the hood and trunk are
fully closed.
3. Visually check the tires. If a tire
looks low, use a gauge to check its
pressure.
4. Check that any items you may be
carrying with you inside are stored
properly or fastened down
securely.
176
Driving
5. Check the adjustment of the seat
(see page 86 ).
6. Check the adjustment of the
inside and outside mirrors (see
page 93 ).
7. Check the adjustment of the
steering wheel (see page 71 ).
8. Make sure the doors are securely
closed and locked.
9. Fasten your seat belt. Check that
your passengers have fastened
their seat belts (see page 15 ).
10.Turn the ignition switch ON (II).
Check the indicator lights in the
instrument panel.
11.Start the engine (see page 177 ).
12.Check the gauges and indicator
lights in the instrument panel (see
page 53 ).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Starting the Engine
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. In cold weather, turn off all
electrical accessories to reduce
the drain on the battery.
3. Make sure the shift lever is in
Park. Press on the brake pedal.
4. Without touching the accelerator
pedal, turn the ignition key to the
START (III) position. If the engine
does not start right away, do not
hold the key in START (III) for
more than 15 seconds at a time.
Pause for at least 10 seconds
before trying again.
5. If the engine does not start within
15 seconds, or starts but stalls
right away, repeat step 4 with the
accelerator pedal pressed half-way
down. If the engine starts, release
pressure on the accelerator pedal
so the engine does not race.
6. If the engine still does not start,
press the accelerator pedal all the
way down and hold it there while
starting in order to clear flooding.
As before, keep the ignition key in
the START (III) position for no
more than 15 seconds. Return to
step 5 if the engine does not start.
If it starts, lift your foot off the
accelerator pedal so the engine
does not race.
Starting in Cold Weather at High
Altitude (Above 8,000 feet/
2,400 meters)
An engine is harder to start in cold
weather. The thinner air found at
high altitude above 8,000 feet (2,400
meters) adds to the problem.
Use the following procedure:
2. Push the accelerator pedal halfway to the floor and hold it there
while starting the engine. Do not
hold the ignition key in START
(III) for more than 15 seconds.
When the engine starts, release
the accelerator pedal gradually as
the engine speeds up and smooths
out.
3. If the engine fails to start in step 2,
push the accelerator pedal to the
floor and hold it there while you
try to start the engine for no more
than 15 seconds. If the engine
does not start, return to step 2.
1. Turn off all electrical accessories
to reduce the drain on the battery.
Driving
177
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic Transmission
Your Acura’s transmission has five
forward speeds, and is electronically
controlled for smoother shifting. It
also has a ‘‘lock-up’’ torque converter
for better fuel economy. You may
feel what seems like another shift
when the converter locks.
Shift Lever Position Indicator
This indicator in the tachometer
shows which position the shift lever
is in. The illuminated number next to
the ‘‘D5 ’’ indicator shows you the
gear you have selected in the
Sequential SportShift mode.
178
Driving
The ‘‘D5 ’’ indicator comes on for a
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch ON (II). If it flashes
while driving (in any shift position),
it indicates a possible problem in the
transmission. Avoid rapid
acceleration and have the
transmission checked by an
authorized Acura dealer as soon as
possible.
The malfunction indicator lamp may
come on along with the ‘‘D5 ’’
indicator if there is a problem in the
automatic transmission control
system.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Positions
SHIFT LEVER
SEQUENTIAL
SPORTSHIFT
MODE
POSITION
The shift lever has nine positions. It
must be in Park or Neutral to start
the engine. When you are stopped in
D5, D4, D3, 2, 1, N, R, or the
Sequential SportShift mode, press
firmly on the brake pedal and keep
your foot off the accelerator pedal.
To select the Sequential SportShift
mode, slide the shift lever toward the
left from the ‘‘D5 ’’ position.
In this mode the shift lever allows
you to shift up and down manually.
To shift from:
P to R
R to N
N to D5
D5 to D4
D4 to D3
D3 to 2
2 to 1
1 to 2
2 to D3
D3 to D4
D4 to D5
D5 to N
N to R
R to P
Do this:
Press the brake pedal, then
move the shift lever.
Move the lever.
Whenever you move the shift lever,
slide it along the guide on the
console.
You cannot shift out of Park with the
brake pedal depressed when the
ignition switch is in LOCK (0) or
ACCESSORY (I).
CONTINUED
Driving
179
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic Transmission
Park (P) − This position mechanically locks the transmission. Use
Park whenever you are turning off or
starting the engine. To shift out of
Park, you must press on the brake
pedal and have your foot off the
accelerator pedal. Move the shift
lever to the right to shift out of the
Park position.
Reverse (R) − To shift to Reverse
from Park, see the explanation under
Park. To shift to Reverse from
Neutral, come to a complete stop and
then shift.
Your car has a reverse lockout so
you cannot accidentally shift to
Reverse from Neutral or any other
driving position when the vehicle
speed exceeds 7 − 9 mph (12 − 14
km/h).
If you have done all of the above and
still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see Shift Lock Release on page
185 .
To avoid transmission damage, come
to a complete stop before shifting
into Park. The shift lever must be in
Park before you can remove the key
from the ignition switch.
180
Driving
If you cannot shift to Reverse when
the car is stopped, press the brake
pedal and slowly shift to Neutral, and
then to Reverse.
If there is a problem in the reverse
lockout system, or your car’s battery
is disconnected or goes dead, you
cannot shift to Reverse. (Refer to
Shift Lock Release on page 185 ).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic Transmission
Neutral (N) − Use Neutral if you
need to restart a stalled engine, or if
it is necessary to stop briefly with
the engine idling. Shift to Park position if you need to leave the car for
any reason. Press on the brake pedal
when you are moving the shift lever
from Neutral to another gear.
Drive (D5) − Use this position for
your normal driving. The
transmission automatically selects a
suitable gear for your speed and
acceleration. You may notice the
transmission shifting up at higher
speeds when the engine is cold. This
helps the engine warm up faster.
Sequential SportShift Mode − With
the shift lever in ‘‘D5 ’’ position, you
can select the Sequential SportShift
mode to shift gears; much like a
manual transmission, but without a
clutch pedal.
To enter the Sequential SportShift
mode, move the shift lever to the left.
To return to ‘‘D5 ’’, move the shift
lever to the right.
When you move the shift lever from
‘‘D5 ’’ to the Sequential SportShift
mode, the display shows the selected
gear.
In the Sequential SportShift mode,
each time you push forward on the
shift lever, the transmission shifts to
a higher gear. Pull back on the lever
to downshift. The number of the
gear selected is displayed next to the
‘‘D5 ’’ indicator (see page 178 ).
+
Upshift
−
Downshift
Even with the Sequential SportShift
Mode selected, the transmission will
automatically upshift and downshift
between first and second gear.
CONTINUED
Driving
181
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic Transmission
When you accelerate away from a
stop, the transmission will start in
first gear and then automatically
upshift to second gear. You have to
manually upshift between second
and fifth gears. Make sure you
upshift before the engine speed
reaches the tachometer’s red zone.
The transmission remains in the
selected gear (5, 4, 3). There is no
automatic downshift when you push
the accelerator pedal to the floor.
The transmission may automatically
downshift from the higher gear to
the lower gear under the following
conditions:
Driving on level roads and downhill
To shift from
4→3
5→4
Speed range
under 18 mph
(29 km/h)
under 34 mph
(55 km/h)
182
Driving
The transmission will also shift
automatically as the vehicle comes to
a complete stop. It will downshift to
first gear when the vehicle speed is
under 9 mph (15 km/h).
If you try to manually downshift at a
speed that would cause the engine to
exceed the redline in a lower gear,
the transmission will not downshift.
The gear indicator will flash the
number of the lower gear several
times, then return to the higher gear.
Driving uphill
To shift from
Downshifting gives you more power
when climbing or provides engine
braking when going down a steep hill.
Speed range
4→3
under 34 mph
(55 km/h)
5→4
under 47 mph
(75 km/h)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic Transmission
If the car speed slows to below the
redline of the selected lower gear
position while the indicator is
flashing, the transmission will
downshift and the display will show
the selected lower gear.
If the transmission temperature is
below 14 °F ( −10 °C), you may not
be able to use the Sequential
SportShift mode.
The table shows the speed ranges
for upshifting and downshifting.
To shift from
To shift from
3→2
under 60 mph*1
(96 km/h)
under 65 mph*2
(104 km/h)
4→3
under 93 mph*1
(150 km/h)
under 104 mph*2
(166 km/h)
5→4
Speed range
2→3
over 9 mph
(15 km/h)
3→4
over 18 mph
(29 km/h)
4→5
over 34 mph
(55 km/h)
Speed range
*1 : Premium model
*2 : Type-S
under 125 mph
(200 km/h)
Drive (D4, D3) − These positions
are similar to D5, except when you
select the D4 position, only the first
four gears are selected. When you
select D3, only the first three gears
are selected. D4 can also keep the
transmission from cycling between
fourth and fifth gears in stop-and-go
driving, and D3 can keep the
transmission from cycling between
third and fourth gears.
Use D3 when towing a trailer in hilly
terrain, or to provide engine braking
when going down a steep hill. D3
gives you more power and increased
engine braking.
CONTINUED
Driving
183
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic Transmission
For faster acceleration when in D3,
D4 or D5, you can get the
transmission to automatically
downshift by pushing the accelerator
pedal to the floor. The transmission
will shift down one or two gears,
depending on your speed.
Second (2) − This position locks
the transmission in second gear. It
does not downshift to first gear
when you come to a stop. Second
gives you more power when climbing,
and increased engine braking when
going down steep hills. Use second
gear when starting out on a slippery
surface or in deep snow. It will help
reduce wheelspin.
184
Driving
First (1) − With the lever in this
position, the transmission locks in
First gear.
If you shift into First position when
the vehicle speed is above 31 mph
(50 km/h), the transmission shifts
into Second gear first to avoid
sudden engine braking.
Engine Speed Limiter
If you exceed the maximum speed
for the gear you are in, the engine
speed will enter into the tachometer’s
red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
the engine cut in and out. This is
caused by a limiter in the engine’s
computer controls. The engine will
run normally when you reduce the
RPM below the red zone.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lock Release
This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal does not work. This procedure
also releases the Reverse Lockout.
1. Set the Parking brake.
2. Make sure the ignition switch is in
the OFF (0) position.
To release the Reverse Lockout,
make sure the ignition switch is in
the ACCESSORY (I) position.
3. Put a cloth on the edge of the Shift
Lock Release slot cover next to
the shift lever.
Use a small flat-tipped screwdriver
or small metal plate (neither are
included in the tool kit) to remove
the cover. Carefully pry off the
edge of the cover.
COVER
4. Insert a screwdriver in the Shift
Lock Release slot.
5. Push down on the screwdriver and
move the shift lever out of Park to
Neutral.
To release the Reverse Lockout,
move the shift lever from Neutral
to Reverse, then Park.
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
6. Remove the screwdriver from the
Shift Lock Release slot, then
reinstall the cover. Make sure the
notch on the cover is on the right
side. Depress the brake pedal and
restart the engine.
If you need to use the Shift Lock
Release, it means your car is
developing a problem. Have the car
checked by your Acura dealer.
Driving
185
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Parking
Always use the parking brake when
you park your car. The indicator on
the instrument panel shows that the
parking brake is not fully released; it
does not indicate that the parking
brake is firmly set. Make sure the
parking brake is set firmly or your
car may roll if it is parked on an
incline.
Set the parking brake before you put
the transmission in Park. This keeps
the car from moving and putting
pressure on the parking mechanism
in the transmission − making it
easier to move the shift lever out of
Park when you want to drive away.
186
Driving
If the car is facing uphill, turn the
front wheels away from the curb.
If the car is facing downhill, turn the
front wheels toward the curb.
Make sure the parking brake is fully
released before driving away.
Driving with the parking brake
partially set can overheat or damage
the rear brakes.
Parking Tips
Make sure the moonroof and the
windows are closed.
Turn off the lights.
Place any packages, valuables, etc.,
in the trunk or take them with you.
Lock the doors with the key or the
remote transmitter. Check the
indicator on the driver’s door to
verify that the security system is
set.
Never park over dry leaves, tall
grass, or other flammable
materials. The three way catalytic
converter gets very hot, and could
cause these materials to catch on
fire.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The Braking System
Your Acura is equipped with disc
brakes at all four wheels. A power
assist helps reduce the effort needed
on the brake pedal. The ABS helps
you retain steering control when
braking very hard.
Put your foot on the brake pedal only
when you intend to brake. Resting
your foot on the pedal keeps the
brakes applied lightly, causing them
to build up heat. Heat build-up can
reduce how well your brakes work. It
also keeps your brake lights on all
the time, confusing drivers behind
you.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds
up heat and reduces their effectiveness. Use the engine to assist the
brakes by downshifting to a lower
gear and taking your foot off the
accelerator pedal.
Check your brakes after driving
through deep water. Apply the
brakes moderately to see if they feel
normal. If not, apply them gently and
frequently until they do. Since a
longer distance is needed to stop
with wet brakes, be extra cautious
and alert in your driving.
Brake Wear Indicators
All four brakes have audible brake
wear indicators.
When the brake pads need replacing,
you will hear a distinctive metallic
‘‘screeching’’ sound when you apply
the brakes. If you do not have the
brake pads replaced, they will begin
screeching all the time.
Your brakes may sometimes squeal
or squeak when you apply them
lightly. Do not confuse this with the
brake wear indicators. They make a
very audible ‘‘screeching.’’
Driving
187
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The Braking System
Brake System Design
The hydraulic system that operates
the brakes has two separate circuits.
Each circuit works diagonally across
the car (the left-front brake is
connected with the right-rear brake,
etc.). If one circuit should develop a
problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
Front
188
Driving
Anti-lock Brakes
Your car has an Anti-lock Brake
System (ABS) as standard
equipment. ABS helps to prevent the
wheels from locking up and skidding
during hard braking, allowing you to
retain steering control.
You should never pump the
brake pedal, this defeats the
purpose of the ABS. Let the ABS
work for you by always keeping firm,
steady pressure on the brake pedal
as you steer away from the hazard.
This is sometimes referred to as
‘‘stomp and steer.’’
When the front tires skid, you lose
steering control; the car continues
straight ahead even though you turn
the steering wheel. The ABS helps to
prevent lock-up and helps you retain
steering control by pumping the
brakes rapidly; much faster than a
person can do it.
You will feel a pulsation in the brake
pedal when the ABS activates, and
you may hear some noise. This is
normal, it is the ABS rapidly
pumping the brakes.
Activation varies with the amount of
traction your tires have. On dry
pavement, you will need to press on
the brake pedal very hard before you
activate the ABS. However, you may
feel the ABS activate immediately if
you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The Braking System
Important Safety Reminders
ABS does not reduce the time or
distance it takes to stop the car, it
only helps with steering control
during braking. You should always
maintain a safe following distance
from other vehicles.
ABS will not prevent a skid that
results from changing direction
abruptly, such as trying to take a
corner too fast or making a sudden
lane change. Always drive at a safe,
prudent speed for the road and
weather conditions.
ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability. Always steer moderately
when you are braking hard. Severe
or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your car to veer into
oncoming traffic or off the road.
A vehicle with ABS may require a
longer distance to stop on loose or
uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
snow, than a vehicle without antilock. Slow down and allow a greater
distance between vehicles under
those conditions.
ABS Indicator
ABS INDICATOR*
*
U.S. indicator shown
The ABS is self-checking. If anything
goes wrong, the ABS indicator on
the instrument panel comes on (see
page 56 ). This means the anti-lock
function of the braking system has
shut down. The brakes still work like
a conventional system without antilock, providing normal stopping
ability. You should have the dealer
inspect your car as soon as possible.
CONTINUED
Driving
189
Main Menu
Table of Contents
The Braking System, Traction Control System
On Premium model
The TCS indicator will come on
along with the ABS indicator.
On Type-S
The VSA system indicator may come
on along with the ABS indicator if
there is a problem with the anti-lock
brake system.
Traction Control System
On Premium model
Your Acura is equipped with a
Traction Control System (TCS) to
assist you in maintaining traction
while driving slowly on loose or
slippery surfaces. The TCS assists
only in low-speed, low-traction
conditions; up to approximately 18
mph (30 km/h).
TCS monitors the speed of all four
wheels. When it senses a front wheel
losing traction, it applies braking to
that wheel. The TCS indicator
flashes when this occurs.
190
Driving
TRACTION CONTROL SYSTEM
INDICATOR
Driving with TCS requires no special
skills or technique. The TCS does
not control your car’s whole braking
system and cannot prevent skidding
if you enter a corner too fast. It is
still your responsibility to drive at
reasonable speeds and to leave a
sufficient margin of safety.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Traction Control System
When starting out or driving at low
speeds on a loose or slippery road
surface, you may notice that the
vehicle does not respond to the
accelerator in the same way it does
at other times. This is a sign TCS is
activating. You will see the TCS
indicator light flash.
You should still install winter tires on
your car during the winter. Make
sure to use the same size originally
supplied with vehicle. Exercise the
same caution in winter driving as you
would if your car was not equipped
with TCS.
Driving with the compact spare tire
installed (see page 274 ) may
activate the TCS. You should turn off
the system.
If the brakes overheat while TCS is
activating, the TCS indicator will
stop flashing and stay on temporarily.
This indicates that TCS has turned
off. After the brakes have cooled
down (usually for about 10 minutes),
TCS will turn back on and the
indicator will turn off.
TCS ON/OFF Switch
TCS ON/OFF SWITCH
This switch is under the side vent. It
lets you turn the Traction Control
System on and off. You cannot turn
off the TCS while the TCS indicator
light is flashing.
Deactivate the system by pressing
the TCS On/Off switch. The TCS
indicator light comes on as a
reminder. Pressing the switch again
turns the system back on.
CONTINUED
Driving
191
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Traction Control System
The Traction Control System turns
on every time you start the engine,
even if you turned it off the last time
you drove the vehicle.
TCS Indicator
The TCS indicator comes on or
flashes under the following conditions:
When you turn the ignition switch
to ON (II).
When you manually turn off TCS.
It flashes when TCS is regulating
wheelspin.
If the system’s diagnostics senses
a problem with TCS, the indicator
will come on and stay on.
If the brakes overheat, the
indicator will come on.
192
Driving
If the TCS indicator comes on and
stays on for more than 10 minutes
while driving, pull to the side of the
road when it is safe and turn off the
engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine, and watch the
TCS indicator. If the indicator
remains on, or comes back on while
driving, have the system inspected
by your Acura dealer. You can still
drive the vehicle without TCS.
This indicator will come on along
with the ABS indicator if there is a
problem in the anti-lock brake
system (see ABS Indicator on page
190 ).
The TCS indicator may occasionally
come on for one or two seconds and
then go out. This is normal.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
On Type-S
The Vehicle Stability Assist system
helps to stabilize the vehicle during
cornering if the car turns more or
less than desired. It also assists you
in maintaining traction while
accelerating on loose or slippery
road surfaces. It does this by
regulating the engine’s output, and
by selectively applying braking.
When VSA activates, you may notice
that the engine does not respond to
the accelerator in the same way it
does at other times. You will also see
the VSA Activation Indicator blink.
The VSA system cannot enhance the
car’s driving stability in all situations
and does not control your vehicle’s
entire braking system. It is still your
responsibility to drive and corner at
reasonable speeds and to leave a
sufficient margin of safety.
VSA Activation Indicator
VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR
When VSA activates, you will see the
VSA Activation indicator blink.
CONTINUED
Driving
193
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
VSA System Indicator
VSA SYSTEM INDICATOR
The VSA system indicator (see page
57 ) comes on and stays on when
there is a problem with the VSA
system. The VSA Activation
indicator will also come on.
194
Driving
If the VSA indicator comes on while
driving, pull to the side of the road
when it is safe and turn off the
engine. Reset the system by
restarting the engine, and watch the
VSA system indicator. If the
indicator remains on, or comes back
on while driving, have the VSA
system inspected by your Acura
dealer.
VSA Off Switch
VSA OFF SWITCH
If the indicator does not come on
when the ignition switch is turned
ON (II), there may be a problem
with the VSA system. Have your
dealer inspect your car as soon as
possible.
This switch is under the left vent.
Press it to turn the Vehicle Stability
Assist system on and off.
Without VSA, your car will have
normal braking and cornering ability,
but it will not have VSA traction and
stability enhancement.
When VSA is off, the VSA Activation
Indicator light comes on as a
reminder. Pressing the switch again
turns the system back on.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
VSA is turned on every time you
start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the car.
VSA and Tire Sizes
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the VSA to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are of the same size
and type as your original tires (see
page 249 ).
Deactivate the VSA system if you
need to drive with the compact spare
tire installed (see page 274 ).
If you install winter tires, make sure
they are the same size as those that
were originally supplied with your
car. Exercise the same caution
during winter driving as you would if
your car was not equipped with VSA.
Driving
195
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Driving in Bad Weather
Rain, fog, and snow conditions
require a different driving technique
because of reduced traction and
visibility. Keep your car wellmaintained and exercise greater
caution when you need to drive in
bad weather. The cruise control
should not be used in these
conditions.
196
Driving
Driving Technique − Always drive
slower than you would in dry
weather. It takes your car longer to
react, even in conditions that may
seem just barely damp. Apply
smooth, even pressure to all the
controls. Abrupt steering wheel
movements or sudden, hard application of the brakes can cause loss of
control in wet weather. Be extra
cautious for the first few miles
(kilometers) of driving while you
adjust to the change in driving
conditions. This is especially true in
snow. A person can forget some
snow-driving techniques during the
summer months. Practice is needed
to relearn those skills.
Exercise extra caution when driving
in rain after a long dry spell. After
months of dry weather, the first
rains bring oil to the surface of the
roadway, making it slippery.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Driving in Bad Weather
Visibility − Being able to see
clearly in all directions and being
visible to other drivers are important
in all weather conditions. This is
more difficult in bad weather. To be
seen more clearly during daylight
hours, turn on your headlights.
Traction − Check your tires
frequently for wear and proper
pressure. Both are important in
preventing ‘‘hydroplaning’’ (loss of
traction on a wet surface). In the
winter, mount snow tires on all four
wheels for the best handling.
Inspect your windshield wipers and
washers frequently. Keep the windshield washer reservoir full of the
proper fluid. Have the windshield
wiper blades replaced if they start to
streak the windshield or leave parts
unwiped. Use the defroster and air
conditioning to keep the windows
from fogging up on the inside (see
pages 120 and 125 ).
Watch road conditions carefully,
they can change from moment to
moment. Wet leaves can be as slippery as ice. ‘‘Clear’’ roads can have
patches of ice. Driving conditions
can be very hazardous when the
outside temperature is near freezing.
The road surface can become
covered with areas of water puddles
mixed with areas of ice, so your
traction can change without warning.
Be very cautious when passing, or
being passed by other vehicles. The
spray from large vehicles reduces
your visibility, and the wind buffeting
can cause you to lose control.
Be careful when downshifting. If
traction is low, you can lock up the
drive wheels for a moment and cause
a skid.
Driving
197
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
Your Acura has been designed
primarily to carry passengers and
their cargo. You can use it to tow a
trailer if you carefully observe the
load limits, use the proper equipment,
and follow the guidelines in this
section.
Load Limits
Total Trailer Weight: The total
weight of the trailer and
everything loaded in it must not
exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg). Towing
a load that is too heavy can
seriously affect your car’s
handling and performance. It can
also damage the engine and
drivetrain.
198
Driving
Tongue Load: The weight that
the tongue of a fully-loaded trailer
puts on the hitch should be
approximately 10 percent of the
trailer weight. Too little tongue
load can make the trailer unstable
and cause it to sway. Too much
tongue load reduces front-tire
traction and steering control.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
To achieve a proper tongue load,
start by loading 60 percent of the
load toward the front of the trailer
and 40 percent toward the rear, then
re-adjust the load as needed.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR):
The total weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all cargo, and the
tongue load must not exceed:
Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR):
The total weight of the vehicle, all
occupants, all cargo, and the
tongue load must not exceed:
Premium model
2,425 lbs (1,100 kg)
on the front axle
1,950 lbs (885 kg)
on the rear axle
Exceeding load limits or
improperly loading your vehicle
and trailer can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously
injured or killed.
Check the loading of your
vehicle and trailer carefully
before starting to drive.
Premium model
4,280 lbs (1,940 kg)
Type-S
Type-S
2,445 lbs (1,110 kg)
on the front axle
4,365 lbs (1,980 kg)
1,950 lbs (885 kg)
on the rear axle
Driving
199
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
Checking Loads
The best way to confirm that vehicle
and trailer weights are within limits
is to have them checked at a public
scale.
Using a suitable scale or a special
tongue load gauge, check the tongue
load the first time you set up a
towing combination (a fully-loaded
vehicle and trailer), then recheck the
tongue load whenever the conditions
change.
Towing Equipment and
Accessories
Towing can require a variety of
equipment, depending on the size of
your trailer, how it will be used, and
how much load you are towing.
Discuss your needs with your trailer
sales or rental agency, and follow the
guidelines in the rest of this section.
Also make sure that all equipment is
properly installed and that it meets
federal, state, province, and local
regulations.
Safety Chains
Always use safety chains. Make sure
they are secured to both the trailer
and hitch, and that they cross under
the tongue so they can catch the
trailer if it becomes unhitched.
Leave enough slack to allow the
trailer to turn corners easily, but do
not let the chains drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
Acura recommends that any trailer
having a total weight of 1,000 lbs
(450 kg) or more be equipped with
its own electric or surge-type brakes.
Hitches
Any hitch used on your vehicle must
be properly bolted to the underbody.
200
Driving
If you choose electric brakes, be
sure they are electronically actuated.
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No
matter how successful it may seem,
any attempt to attach trailer brakes
to your vehicle’s hydraulic system
will lower braking effectiveness and
create a potential hazard.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
Trailer Lights
Your car has a trailer lighting
connector located in the trunk by the
left taillight. To use the connector,
undo the fastener and unscrew the
cargo net mounting button on the
left side of the trunk lining. Refer to
the drawing in this page for the
wiring color code and purpose of
each pin.
GROUND
(BLACK)
BACK-UP LIGHT
(GREEN/BLACK)
LEFT TURN SIGNAL
(GREEN/BLUE)
If you use a converter, you can get
the connector and pins that mate
with the connector in your car from
your Acura dealer.
Since lighting and wiring vary in
trailer type and brand, you should
also have a qualified mechanic install
a suitable connector between the
vehicle and the trailer.
RIGHT TURN SIGNAL
(GREEN/YELLOW)
BRAKE LIGHT
(WHITE/BLACK)
TAILLIGHT
(RED/BLACK)
CONTINUED
Driving
201
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
Additional Trailer Equipment
Many states and Canadian provinces
require special outside mirrors when
towing a trailer. Even if they don’t,
you should install special mirrors if
you cannot clearly see behind you, or
if the trailer creates a blind spot.
Ask your trailer sales or rental
agency if any other items are
recommended or required for your
towing situation.
Pre-Tow Checklist
When preparing to tow, and before
driving away, be sure to check the
following:
The vehicle has been properly
serviced, and the tires, brakes,
suspension, and cooling system
are in good operating condition.
All weights and loads are within
limits (see pages 198 and 199 ).
The hitch, safety chains, and any
other attachments are secure.
All items on and in the trailer are
properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
The lights and brakes on your
vehicle and the trailer are working
properly.
202
Driving
Your vehicle tires and spare are
properly inflated (see page 246 ),
and the trailer tires and spare are
inflated as recommended by the
trailer maker.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
Driving Safely With a Trailer
The added weight, length, and
height of a trailer will affect your
vehicle’s handling and performance,
so driving with a trailer requires
some special driving skills and
techniques.
For your safety and the safety of
others, take time to practice driving
maneuvers before heading for the
open road, and follow the guidelines
discussed below.
When towing a trailer in the
Sequential SportShift mode, select
Fourth, Third, Second, or First gear;
depending on the vehicle speed and
road condition. Do not use Fifth gear.
The recommended speed range for
each gear position is shown in the
table.
Gear position
Speed range
1
0 − 37 mph
(0 − 60 km/h)
2
12 − 68 mph
(20 − 110 km/h)
3, 4
over 25 mph
(over 40 km/h)
Towing Speeds and Gears
Drive slower than normal in all
driving situations, and obey posted
speed limits for vehicles with trailers.
Use the D5 or D4 position when
towing a trailer on level roads. D3 is
the proper shift lever position to use
when towing a trailer in hilly terrain.
(See ‘‘Driving on Hills ’’ in the
following column for additional gear
information.)
Making Turns and Braking
Make turns more slowly and wider
than normal. The trailer tracks a
smaller are than your vehicle, and it
can hit or run over something the
vehicle misses. Allow more time and
distance for braking. Do not brake or
turn suddenly as this could cause the
trailer to jackknife or turn over.
Driving on Hills
When climbing hills, closely watch
your temperature gauge. If it nears
the red (Hot) mark, turn the air
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if
necessary, pull to the side of the
road to let the engine cool.
If the transmission shifts frequently
between 4th and 5th gears while
going up a hill, shift to D4. And if the
transmission shifts frequently
between 3rd and 4th gears, shift to
D3.
CONTINUED
Driving
203
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Towing a Trailer
If you must stop when facing uphill,
use the foot brake or parking brake.
Do not try to hold the vehicle in
place by pressing on the accelerator,
as this can cause the automatic
transmission to overheat.
When driving down hills, reduce
your speed and shift down to 2nd
gear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, and
remember it will take longer to slow
down and stop when towing a trailer.
204
Driving
Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting
Parking
Crosswinds and air turbulence
caused by passing trucks can disrupt
your steering and cause trailer
swaying. When being passed by a
large vehicle, keep a constant speed
and steer straight ahead. Do not try
to make quick steering or braking
corrections.
Follow all normal precautions when
parking, including putting the
transmission in Park and firmly
setting the parking brake. Also, place
wheel chocks at each of the trailer’s
tires.
Backing Up
Always drive slowly and have
someone guide you when backing up.
Grip the bottom of the steering
wheel; then turn the wheel to the left
to get the trailer to move to the left,
and turn the wheel right to move the
trailer to the right.
Main Menu
Maintenance
This section explains why it is
important to keep your car well
maintained and to follow basic
maintenance safety precautions.
This section also includes
Maintenance Schedules for normal
driving and severe driving conditions,
a Maintenance Record, and instructions for simple maintenance tasks
you may want to take care of
yourself.
If you have the skills and tools to perform more complex maintenance
tasks on your Acura, you may want
to purchase the Service Manual. See
page 321 for information on how to
obtain a copy, or see your Acura
dealer.
Maintenance Safety ....................... 206
Important Safety Precautions .. 207
Maintenance Schedule .................. 208
Required Maintenance Record .... 215
Owner Maintenance Checks ........ 217
Fluid Locations............................... 218
Engine Oil ....................................... 219
Adding Oil................................... 219
Recommended Oil ..................... 219
Synthetic Oil ............................... 220
Additives ..................................... 220
Changing the Oil and Filter ...... 221
Cooling System .............................. 223
Adding Engine Coolant ............. 223
Replacing Engine Coolant ........ 225
Windshield Washers ..................... 229
Automatic Transmission Fluid..... 230
Brake Fluid ..................................... 231
Brake System ............................. 231
Power Steering ............................... 232
Hood Latch ..................................... 233
Air Cleaner Element ...................... 233
Spark Plugs ..................................... 235
Replacement ............................... 235
Specifications ............................. 237
Battery ............................................ 238
Wiper Blades .................................. 241
Air Conditioning System ............... 243
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 244
Drive Belts ...................................... 244
Timing Belt ..................................... 245
Tires ................................................ 245
Inflation ....................................... 245
Inspection ................................... 247
Maintenance ............................... 248
Tire Rotation .............................. 248
Replacing Tires and Wheels .... 249
Wheels and Tires ....................... 250
Winter Driving ........................... 250
Snow Tires .............................. 251
Tire Chains ............................. 251
Lights .............................................. 252
Headlight Aiming ...................... 254
Replacing Bulbs ......................... 254
Storing Your Car ............................ 263
Maintenance
205
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Safety
Regularly maintaining your car is the
best way to protect your investment.
Proper maintenance is essential to
your safety and the safety of your
passengers. It will also reward you
with more economical, trouble-free
driving and help reduce air pollution.
Improperly maintaining this car
or failing to correct a problem
before driving can cause a
crash in which you can be
seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection
and maintenance
recommendations and
schedules in this owner’s
manual.
206
Maintenance
This section includes instructions for
simple maintenance tasks, such as
checking and adding oil. Any service
items not detailed in this section
should be performed by an Acura
technician or other qualified
mechanic.
Some of the most important safety
precautions are given here. However,
we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in
performing maintenance. Only you
can decide whether or not you
should perform a given task.
Failure to properly follow
maintenance instructions and
precautions can cause you to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures
and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Safety
Important Safety Precautions
Before you begin any maintenance,
make sure your car is parked on
level ground and that the parking
brake is set. Also, be sure the engine
is off. This will help to eliminate
several potential hazards:
Carbon monoxide poisoning
from engine exhaust. Be sure
there is adequate ventilation
whenever you operate the engine.
Burns from hot parts. Let the
engine and exhaust system cool
before touching any parts.
Read the instructions before you
begin, and make sure you have the
tools and skills required.
To reduce the possibility of fire or
explosion, be careful when working
around gasoline or batteries. Use a
commercially available degreaser or
parts cleaner, not gasoline, to clean
parts. Keep cigarettes, sparks, and
flames away from the battery and all
fuel-related parts.
You should wear eye protection and
protective clothing when working
near the battery or when using
compressed air.
Injury from moving parts. Do
not run the engine unless instructed to do so.
Maintenance
207
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Schedule
The Maintenance Schedule specifies
how often you should have your car
serviced and what things need
attention. It is essential that you have
your car serviced as scheduled to
retain its high level of safety,
dependability, and emissions control
performance.
The services and time or distance
intervals shown in the maintenance
schedule assume you will use your
car as normal transportation for
passengers and their possessions.
You should also follow these
recommendations:
Avoid exceeding your car’s load
limit. This puts excess stress on
the engine, brakes, and many
other parts of your car. The load
limit is shown on the label on the
driver’s doorjamb.
Operate your car on reasonable
roads within the legal speed limit.
Drive your car regularly over a
distance of several miles
(kilometers).
Always use unleaded gasoline with
the proper octane rating (see page
162 ).
208
Maintenance
Which Schedule to Follow:
Service your car according to the
time and mileage periods on one of
the Maintenance Schedules on the
following pages. Select the schedule
for ‘‘Severe Conditions’’ if most of
your driving is done under one or
more of the conditions listed on that
page. Otherwise, follow the schedule
for ‘‘Normal Conditions.’’
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Maintenance Schedule
Your authorized Acura dealer knows
your car best and can provide
competent, efficient service.
However, service at a dealer is not
mandatory to keep your warranties
in effect. Maintenance may be done
by any qualified service facility or
person who is skilled in this type of
automotive service. Keep all the
receipts as proof of completion, and
have the person who does the work
fill out the Maintenance Record.
Check your warranty booklet for
more information.
We recommend the use of genuine
Acura parts and fluids whenever you
have maintenance done. These are
manufactured to the same highquality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
U.S. Vehicles:
Maintenance, replacement or
repair of emissions control
devices and systems may be done
by any automotive repair
establishment or individual using
parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
standards.
According to state and federal
regulations, failure to perform
maintenance on the items marked
with # will not void your emissions
warranties. However, Acura
recommends that all maintenance
services be performed at the
recommended time or mileage
period to ensure long-term reliability.
Maintenance
209
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Service at the indicated
miles x 1,000
distance or time − whichever
km x 1,000
comes first.
months
Replace engine oil
Replace engine oil filter
Check engine oil and coolant
Replace air cleaner element
Inspect valve clearance
Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt, and inspect water pump
Inspect and adjust drive belts
Inspect idle speed
Replace engine coolant
Replace transmission fluid
15
24
12
45
60
75
90
105
30
72
96
120
144
168
48
36
48
60
72
84
24
Replace every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 1 year
Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
Adjust only if noisy
120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km) or 5 years
120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 6 years, then every
90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 5 years
Inspect front and rear brakes
Replace brake fluid
Every 3 years (independent of mileage)
Check parking brake adjustment
Replace dust and pollen filter
Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition
Rotate tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
at least once per month)
Visually inspect the following items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Suspension components
Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Cooling system hoses and connections
#
Exhaust system
#
Fuel lines and connections
#: See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page 209 .
210
Maintenance
120
192
96
U.S. Owners
Follow the Normal Conditions
Maintenance Schedule if the
severe driving conditions
specified in the Severe
Conditions Maintenance
Schedule do not apply.
NOTE: If you only
OCCASIONALLY drive under a
‘‘severe’’ condition, you should
follow the Normal Conditions
Maintenance Schedule.
Canadian Owners
Follow the Maintenance
Schedule for Severe Conditions.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
7,500 mi/12,000 km
15,000 mi/24,000 km/1 yr
22,500 mi/36,000 km
30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs
37,500 mi/60,000 km
3 yrs
45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs
52,500 mi/84,000 km
60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs
67,500 mi/108,000 km
75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs
82,500 mi/132,000 km
6 yrs
90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 yrs
97,500 mi/156,000 km
105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs
112,500 mi/180,000 km
120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km/6 yrs
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B, C.
Do items in A.
□Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B, C.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
□Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).
Do items in A, B, C.
Do items in A.
□Replace timing belt, and inspect water pump.
□Inspect valve clearance.
□Check idle speed.
□Replace spark plugs.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B, C.
□Replace engine coolant, then replace every
60,000 mi/96,000 km/5 yrs.
□Replace transmission fluid, then replace every
90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs.
A □Replace engine oil.
□Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 248 ).
B □Replace engine oil filter.
□Inspect front and rear brakes.
□Check parking brake adjustment.
□Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.
□Inspect suspension components.
□Inspect driveshaft boots.
□Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).
□Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and check
for leaks.
□Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.
□#Inspect exhaust system.
□#Inspect fuel lines and connections.
C □Replace air cleaner element.
□Inspect and adjust drive belts.
□Replace dust and pollen filter.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last
column, page 209 .
NOTE:
Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.
Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.
Maintenance
211
Maintenance Schedule for Normal Conditions (listed by distance/time)
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in A, B, C as required for each distance/time interval.
U.S. Owners − Refer to page 210 to determine which schedule to use.
Canadian Owners − Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Service at the indicated
miles x 1,000
distance or time − whichever
km x 1,000
comes first.
months
Replace engine oil and oil filter
Check engine oil and coolant
Clean ( ) or replace ( ) air
Type-S
cleaner element
Premium model
−Use normal schedule except in
dusty conditions
Inspect valve clearance
Replace spark plugs
#
Replace timing belt*1, and inspect water pump
Inspect and adjust drive belts
Inspect idle speed
Replace engine coolant
15
24
12
30
45
60
75
90
105
48
72
96
120
144
168
24
36
48
60
72
84
Replace every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or 6 months
Check oil and coolant at each fuel stop
120
192
96
Adjust only if noisy
120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 10 years, then every 60,000 miles
(96,000 km) or 5 years
60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 3 years, then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 2 years
Replace transmission fluid
Inspect front and rear brakes
Inspect every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months
Replace brake fluid
Every 3 years (independent of mileage)
Check parking brake adjustment
*2
Replace dust and pollen filter
Lubricate all hinges, locks, and latches
Rotate tires (Check tire inflation and condition
Rotate tires every 7,500 miles (12,000 km)
at least once per month)
Visually inspect the following items:
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots
Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months
Suspension components, Driveshaft boots
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS)
All fluid levels and condition of fluids
Cooling system hoses and connections
#
Exhaust system, #Fuel lines and connections
Lights and controls, Vehicle underbody
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last column, page 209 .
*1 : See timing belt on page 245 for replacement information under special driving conditions.
*2 : See dust and pollen filter on page 244 for replacement information under special driving conditions.
212
Maintenance
U.S. Owners
Follow the Severe Conditions
Maintenance Schedule if you
drive your car MAINLY under
one or more of the following
conditions:
Driving less than 5 miles (8
km) per trip or, in freezing
temperatures, driving less
than 10 miles (16 km) per trip.
Driving in extremely hot
[over 90°F (32°C)] conditions.
Extensive idling or long
periods of stop-and-go driving.
Trailer towing, driving with a
roof rack, or driving in
mountainous conditions.
Driving on muddy, dusty, or
de-iced roads.
Canadian Owners
Follow the Maintenance
Schedule for Severe Conditions.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
3,750 mi/6,000 km
7,500 mi/12,000 km
11,250 mi/18,000 km
15,000 mi/24,000 km/1 yr
18,750 mi/30,000 km
22,500 mi/36,000 km
26,250 mi/42,000 km
30,000 mi/48,000 km/2 yrs
33,750 mi/54,000 km
37,500 mi/60,000 km
41,250 mi/66,000 km
3 yrs
45,000 mi/72,000 km/3 yrs
48,750 mi/78,000 km
52,500 mi/84,000 km
56,250 mi/90,000 km
60,000 mi/96,000 km/4 yrs
60,000 mi/96,000 km/3 yrs
63,750 mi/102,000 km
67,500 mi/108,000 km
71,250 mi/114,000 km
75,000 mi/120,000 km/5 yrs
78,750 mi/126,000 km
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
□Clean air cleaner element.*1
Do items in A, B, C.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B, C, D.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
□Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).
□Clean air cleaner element.*1
Do items in A, B, C.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
□#Replace timing belt*2, and inspect water pump.
Do items in A, B, C, D.
□Replace transmission fluid.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
□Clean air cleaner element.*1
Do items in A, B, C.
Do items in A.
A □Replace engine oil and filter.
B □Inspect front and rear brakes.
□Rotate tires (follow pattern on page 248 ).
□Inspect tie rod ends, steering gear box and boots.
□Inspect suspension components.
□Inspect driveshaft boots.
C □Replace air cleaner element. (Type-S)
□Check parking brake adjustment.
□Lubricate all hinges, locks and latches with
multipurpose grease.
□Inspect brake hoses and lines (including ABS).
□Check all fluid levels, condition of fluids, and check
for leaks.
□Inspect cooling system hoses and connections.
□#Inspect exhaust system.
□#Inspect fuel lines and connections.
□Check all lights.
□Inspect the underbody.
D □Replace air cleaner element. (Premium model)
□Inspect and adjust drive belts.
□Replace dust and pollen filter*3.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last
column, page 209 .
NOTE:
Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.
Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.
*1 : Premium model only
*2 : See timing belt on page 245 for replacement information under special driving conditions.
*3 : See dust and pollen filter on page 244 for replacement information under special driving
conditions.
CONTINUED
Maintenance 213
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (listed by distance/time)
Service at the indicated distance or time, whichever comes first. Do the items in A, B, C, D as required for each distance/time interval.
U.S. Owners − Refer to page 212 to determine which schedule to use.
Canadian Owners − Use the Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions.
Maintenance Schedule for Severe Conditions (listed by distance/time)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
82,500 mi/132,000 km
86,250 mi/138,000 km
6 yrs
90,000 mi/144,000 km/6 yrs
90,000 mi/144,000 km/5 yrs
93,750 mi/150,000 km
97,500 mi/156,000 km
101,250 mi/162,000 km
105,000 mi/168,000 km/7 yrs
108,750 mi/174,000 km
112,500 mi/180,000 km
116,250 mi/186,000 km
120,000 mi/192,000 km/8 yrs
9 yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km/10 yrs
120,000 mi/192,000 km/7 yrs
214
Maintenance
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
□Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).
Do items in A, B, C, D.
□Replace transmission fluid.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
□Replace timing belt*2, and inspect water pump.
□Check idle speed.
□Clean air cleaner element.*1
□Replace spark plugs.
□Inspect valve clearance.
Do items in A, B, C.
Do items in A.
Do items in A, B.
Do items in A.
□Replace timing belt*2, and inspect water pump.
Do items in A, B, C, D.
□Replace brake fluid (independent of mileage).
□Replace engine coolant, then replace every
60,000 mi/96,000 km/5 yrs.
□Replace transmission fluid.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty, last
column, page 209 .
*1 : Premium model only
*2 : See timing belt on page 245 for replacement information under
special driving conditions.
*3 : See dust and pollen filter on page 244 for replacement information
under special driving conditions.
NOTE:
Check engine oil and coolant at each fuel stop.
Check and adjust valve clearance, cold engine, only if noisy.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here, whether you follow the schedule for normal conditions (page 210 ) or severe
conditions (page 212 ). Keep the receipts for all work done on your car.
3,750 mi
6,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp
mi/km
33,750 mi
54,000 km
Date
7,500 mi
12,000 km
mi/km
mi/km
37,500 mi
60,000 km
mi/km
18,750 mi
30,000 km
mi/km
Date
mi/km
45,000 mi
72,000 km
(or 3 years)
mi/km
48,750 mi
78,000 km
mi/km
mi/km
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
56,250 mi
90,000 km
Date
30,000 mi
48,000 km
(or 2 years)
Date
Date
52,500 mi
84,000 km
Date
26,250 mi
42,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
22,500 mi
36,000 km
mi/km
Date
41,250 mi
66,000 km
Date
15,000 mi
24,000 km
(or 1 year)
mi/km
Date
Date
11,250 mi
18,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp
mi/km
Date
60,000 mi
96,000 km
(or 4 years)
mi/km
Date
CONTINUED
Maintenance
215
Table of Contents
Main Menu
Required Maintenance Record (for Normal and Severe Schedules)
63,750 mi
102,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp
mi/km
93,750 mi
150,000 km
Date
67,500 mi
108,000 km
mi/km
mi/km
97,500 mi
156,000 km
mi/km
78,750 mi
126,000 km
mi/km
Date
101,250 mi
162,000 km
mi/km
105,000 mi
168,000 km
(or 7 years)
mi/km
108,750 mi
174,000 km
mi/km
mi/km
112,500 mi
180,000 km
216
Maintenance
mi/km
Date
mi/km
Date
116,250 mi
186,000 km
Date
90,000 mi
144,000 km
(or 6 years)
Date
Date
Date
86,250 mi
138,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
82,500 mi
132,000 km
mi/km
Date
Date
75,000 mi
120,000 km
(or 5 years)
mi/km
Date
Date
71,250 mi
114,000 km
Signature or dealer stamp
mi/km
Date
120,000 mi
192,000 km
(or 8 years)
mi/km
Date
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Owner Maintenance Checks
You should check the following
items at the specified intervals. If
you are unsure of how to perform
any check, turn to the page given.
Engine oil level − Check every
time you fill the fuel tank. See
page 165 .
Engine coolant level − Check the
radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page 167 .
Windshield washer fluid − Check
the level in the reservoir monthly.
If weather conditions cause you to
use the washers frequently, check
the reservoir each time you stop
for fuel. See page 229 .
Tires − Check the tire pressure
monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
245 .
Lights − Check the operation of
the headlights, parking lights,
taillights, high-mount brake light,
turn signals, brake lights, and
license plate lights monthly. See
page 252 .
Automatic transmission − Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
230 .
Brakes − Check the fluid level
monthly. See page 231 .
Maintenance
217
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fluid Locations
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK
(Orange loop)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
BRAKE FLUID
(Gray cap)
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
ENGINE
COOLANT
RESERVOIR
RADIATOR CAP
POWER STEERING
FLUID (Red cap)
218
Maintenance
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Engine Oil
Adding Oil
Recommended Oil
Oil is major contributor to your
engine’s performance and longevity.
Always use a premium-grade
detergent oil displaying the API
Certification Seal. This seal indicates
the oil is energy conserving, and that
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements. It is
highly recommended that you use
Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
as long as you own it.
Make sure the API Certification Seal
says ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
API CERTIFICATION SEAL
To add oil, unscrew and remove the
engine oil fill cap on top of the valve
cover. Pour in the oil, and install the
engine oil fill cap. Tighten it securely.
Wait a few minutes and recheck the
oil level. Do not fill above the upper
mark; you could damage the engine.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
219
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Engine Oil
The oil’s viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
Select the oil for your vehicle
according to this chart.
Ambient Temperature
5W-20 oil is formulated for yearround protection of your Acura, to
improve cold weather starting, and
to help your engine use less fuel.
If 5W-20 oil is not available, a 5W-30
oil may be used. However, it should
be replaced with 5W-20 at the next
oil change.
220
Maintenance
Synthetic Oil
You may use a synthetic motor oil if
it meets the same requirements
given for a conventional motor oil: it
displays the API Certification Seal,
and it is the proper weight as shown
on the chart. When using synthetic
oil, you must follow the oil and filter
change intervals given in the
maintenance schedule.
Additives
Your Acura does not require any oil
additives. Additives may adversely
affect your engine’s or transmission’s
performance and durability.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Engine Oil
Changing the Oil and Filter
Always change the oil and filter
according to the time and distance
(miles/kilometers) recommendations in the maintenance schedule.
The oil and filter collect contaminants that can damage your engine if
they are not removed regularly.
Changing the oil and filter requires
special tools and access from
underneath the car. The car should
be raised on a service station-type
hydraulic lift for this service. Unless
you have the knowledge and proper
equipment, you should have this
maintenance done by a skilled
mechanic.
OIL DRAIN
BOLT
OIL FILTER
WASHER
1. Run the engine until it reaches
normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
2. Open the hood and remove the
engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
drain bolt and washer from the
bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
into an appropriate container.
3. Remove the oil filter and let the
remaining oil drain. A special
wrench (available from your Acura
dealer) is required to remove the
filter.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
221
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Engine Oil
4. Install a new oil filter according to
instructions that come with it.
5. Put a new washer on the drain bolt,
then reinstall the drain bolt.
Tighten it to:
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)
6. Refill the engine with the recommended oil.
Engine oil change capacity
(including filter):
4.6 US qt (4.4 , 3.9 Imp qt)
222
Maintenance
7. Replace the engine oil fill cap.
Start the engine. The oil pressure
indicator light should go out within
five seconds. If it does not, turn off
the engine and reinspect your
work.
8. Let the engine run for several
minutes and check the drain bolt
and oil filter for leaks.
9. Turn off the engine, let it sit for
several minutes, then check the oil
level. If necessary, add oil to bring
the level to the upper mark on the
dipstick.
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
harmf ul to the environment. If you
change your own oil, please dispose of
the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container and take it to a recycling
center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
or dump it on the ground.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Cooling System
Adding Engine Coolant
RESERVE TANK
If the coolant level in the reserve
tank is at or below the MIN line, add
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line.
Inspect the cooling system for leaks.
This coolant should always be a
mixture of 50 percent antifreeze and
50 percent water. Never add straight
antifreeze or plain water.
Always use Honda All Season
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2. This
coolant is pre-mixed with 50 percent
antifreeze and 50 percent water. It
does not require any additional
mixing. If it is not available, you may
use another major-brand non-silicate
coolant as a temporary replacement.
Make sure it is a high-quality coolant
recommended for aluminum engines.
However, continued use of any nonHonda coolant can result in
corrosion, causing the cooling
system to malfunction or fail. Have
the cooling system flushed and
refilled with Honda antifreeze/
coolant as soon as possible.
If the reserve tank is completely
empty, you should also check the
coolant level in the radiator.
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
1. Make sure the engine and radiator
are cool.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
223
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Cooling System
RESERVE TANK
RADIATOR CAP
2. Turn the radiator cap counterclockwise, without pressing down
on it, until it stops. This relieves
any pressure remaining in the
cooling system.
3. Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
224
Maintenance
4. The coolant level should be up to
the base of the filler neck. Add
coolant if it is low.
5. Put the radiator cap back on.
Tighten it fully.
6. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
Fill it to halfway between the MAX
and MIN marks. Put the cap back
on the reserve tank.
Do not add any rust inhibitors or
other additives to your car’s cooling
system. They may not be compatible
with the coolant or engine components.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Cooling System
Replacing Engine Coolant
The cooling system should be
completely drained and refilled with
new coolant according to the time
and distance recommendations in
the maintenance schedule. Only use
Honda All Season Antifreeze/
Coolant Type 2.
Draining the coolant requires access
to the underside of the car. Unless
you have the tools and knowledge,
you should have this maintenance
done by a skilled mechanic.
DRAIN PLUG
1. Turn the ignition ON (II). Turn
the heater temperature control
dial to maximum heat (climate
control to 90°F/32°C). Turn off
the ignition. Open the hood. Make
sure the engine and radiator are
cool to the touch.
3. Loosen the drain plug on the
bottom of the radiator. The
coolant will drain through the
splash guard.
Drain the coolant into an
appropriate container.
2. Remove the radiator cap.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
225
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Cooling System
RESERVE TANK
DRAIN BOLT
RUBBER
HOSE
4. Install a rubber hose on the drain
bolt at the rear of the engine
cylinder block. Loosen the drain
bolt.
Drain the coolant into an
appropriate container.
226
Maintenance
CRUISE CONTROL CABLE
5. Before removing the reserve tank,
remove the cruise control cable
from its clip, then remove the
ground cable from the clip on the
reserve tank. To remove the
cruise control cable, pivot the
upper part of the clip and push
down the lower part slightly.
HOLDER
RESERVE TANK CAP
6. Remove the reserve tank from its
holder by pulling it straight up.
Drain the coolant into an
appropriate container, then put the
tank back in its holder.
After installing the tank back in
place, put the cables back in their
clips.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Cooling System
7. When the coolant stops draining,
tighten the drain plug at the
bottom of the radiator.
RESERVE TANK
Tighten the drain bolt at the rear
of the engine cylinder block
securely.
Tightening torque:
7 lbf·ft (10 N·m , 1.0 kgf·m)
8. Pour Honda All Season
Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2 into
the radiator up to the base of the
filler neck. This coolant is a
mixture of 50 percent antifreeze
and 50 percent water. Pre-mixing
is not required.
The cooling system capacity is:
1.48 US gal (5.6 , 1.23 Imp gal)
Fill up to here
FILLER NECK
9. Start the engine and let it run for
about 30 seconds. Then turn off
the engine. Pour coolant into the
radiator up to the base of the filler
neck.
10.Fill the reserve tank to the MAX
mark. Install the reserve tank cap.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
227
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Cooling System
11.Install the radiator cap, and
tighten it to the first stop.
RESERVE TANK
12.Start the engine and let it run until
the radiator cooling fan comes on
at least twice. Then stop the
engine.
13.Remove the radiator cap. Pour
coolant into the radiator up to the
base of the filler neck and into the
reserve tank up to the MAX mark.
14.Start the engine and hold it at
1,500 rpm until the cooling fan
comes on. Turn off the engine.
Check the coolant level in the
radiator and add coolant if needed.
15.Install the radiator cap, and
tighten it fully.
228
Maintenance
16.If necessary, fill the reserve tank
to the MAX mark. Install the
reserve tank cap.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Windshield Washers
Check the level in the windshield
washer reservoir at least monthly
during normal usage. In bad weather,
when you use the washers often,
check the level every time you stop
for fuel.
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
windshield washer fluid. This
increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
The windshield washer reservoir is
located behind the passenger’s side
headlight.
Do not use engine antif reeze or a
vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir.
Canadian Models
The low washer level indicator will
light when the level is low (see page
59 ).
LEVEL GAUGE
Check the reservoir’s fluid level by
removing the cap and looking at the
level gauge attached to the cap.
Antif reeze can damage your car’s paint,
while a vinegar/water solution can
damage the windshield washer pump.
Use only commercially-available
windshield washer f luid.
When you refill the reservoir, clean
the edges of the windshield wiper
blades with windshield washer fluid
on a clean cloth. This will help to
condition the blade edges.
Maintenance
229
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic Transmission Fluid
5. If the level is below the lower
mark, remove the fill plug and add
fluid to bring it to the upper mark.
DIPSTICK
UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
Check the fluid level with the engine
at normal operating temperature.
1. Park the car on level ground. Shut
off the engine.
2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
from the transmission and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
230
Maintenance
3. Insert the dipstick all the way into
the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
4. Remove the dipstick and check
the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks.
Always use Honda ATF-Z1
(Automatic Transmission Fluid). If it
is not available, you may use a
DEXRON III automatic
transmission fluid as a temporary
replacement. However, continued
use can affect shift quality. Have the
transmission flushed and refilled
with Honda ATF-Z1 as soon as it is
convenient.
To thoroughly flush the transmission,
the technician should drain and refill
it with Honda ATF-Z1, then drive the
vehicle a short distance. Do this
three times. Then drain and refill the
transmission a final time.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Automatic Transmission Fluid, Brake Fluid
6. Insert the dipstick all the way back
into the transmission securely as
shown in the illustration.
Brake Fluid
Check the fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir monthly.
The transmission should be drained
and refilled with new fluid according
to the time and distance recommendations in the maintenance schedule.
The brake fluid should be replaced
according to the time recommendation in the maintenance schedule.
Brake System
MAX
MIN
If you are not sure how to add fluid,
contact your Acura dealer.
Always use Honda Heavy Duty
Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
available, you should use only DOT 3
or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary
replacement. However, the use of
any non-Honda brake fluid can cause
corrosion and decrease the life of the
system. Have the brake system
flushed and refilled with Honda
Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as
soon as possible.
The fluid level should be between
the MIN and MAX marks on the side
of the reservoir. If the level is at or
below the MIN mark, your brake
system needs attention. Have the
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not
compatible with your car’s braking
system and can cause extensive
damage.
Maintenance
231
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Power Steering
Check the level when the engine is
cold. Look at the side of the
reservoir. The fluid should be
between the UPPER LEVEL and
LOWER LEVEL. If it is below the
LOWER LEVEL, add power steering
fluid to the UPPER LEVEL.
UPPER LEVEL
A low power steering fluid level can
indicate a leak in the system. Check
the fluid level frequently and have
the system inspected as soon as
possible.
Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
LOWER LEVEL
Always use Honda Power Steering
Fluid. If it is not available, you may
use another power steering fluid as
an emergency replacement.
However, continued use can cause
increased wear and poor steering in
cold weather. Have the power
steering system flushed and refilled
with Honda PSF as soon as possible.
232
Maintenance
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Hood Latch, Air Cleaner Element
Hood Latch
LATCH ASSEMBLY
Air Cleaner Element
The air cleaner element should be
cleaned or replaced according to the
time and distance recommendations
in the maintenance schedule.
BOLTS
Cleaning (Severe Conditions)
Premium model
Clean the hood latch assembly with a
mild cleaner, then lubricate it with a
multipurpose grease. Lubricate all
the moving parts (as shown),
including the pivot. Follow the time
and distance recommendations in
the Maintenance Schedule. If you
are not sure how to clean and grease
the latch, contact your Acura dealer.
Clean the air cleaner element by
blowing compressed air through it in
the opposite direction to normal air
flow. If you do not have access to
compressed air (such as a service
station), ask your Acura dealer to do
this service.
Follow the replacement procedure
for removal and reinstallation.
2. On Premium model
Loosen the four bolts by using a
Phillips-head screwdriver and
remove the air cleaner housing
cover.
Replacement
The air cleaner element is inside the
air cleaner housing on the driver’s
side of the engine compartment.
To replace it:
1. Remove the cruise control cable
from its clip.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
233
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Air Cleaner Element
BOLTS
LOOP
On Type-S
Loosen the two bolts with a
Phillips-head screwdriver. Remove
the air cleaner housing cover by
lifting and pivoting it out of the
loops.
Premium model
AIR CLEANER
ELEMENT
3. Remove the old air cleaner
element.
4. Carefully clean the inside of the
air cleaner housing with a damp
rag.
5. Place the new air cleaner element
in the air cleaner housing.
Type-S
AIR CLEANER
ELEMENT
6. On Premium model
Reinstall the air cleaner housing
cover, tighten the four bolts.
On Type-S
Align the tabs on the battery side
and reinstall the air cleaner
housing cover, then tighten the
two bolts.
7. Put the cruise control cable back
in place.
234
Maintenance
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Spark Plugs
The spark plugs in your car are a
special platinum-tipped design for
longer life. The spark plugs should
be replaced according to the time
and distance recommendations in
the maintenance schedule.
Replacement
CONNECTOR
LOCK
TAB
HOLDING CLIP
1. Loosen the two holding clips by
turning the heads one-quarter turn
counterclockwise with a flat-tipped
screwdriver. Remove the cover on
the front cylinder bank by pulling
it straight up.
IGNITION COIL
3. Disconnect the wire connector
from the ignition coil by pushing
on the lock tab and pulling on the
connector. Pull on the plastic
connector, not the wires.
2. Clean up any dirt and oil that have
collected around the ignition coils.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
235
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Spark Plugs
HEXAGON SOCKET HEAD CAP BOLT
4. Use a wrench to remove the
hexagon socket head cap bolt
holding the ignition coil. Remove
the ignition coil by pulling it
straight out.
5. Remove the spark plug with
a five-eighths inch (16 mm) spark
plug socket.
236
Maintenance
6. Put the new spark plug into the
socket; then screw it into the hole.
Screw it in by hand so you do not
crossthread it.
7. Torque the spark plug. (If you do
not have a torque wrench, tighten
the spark plug two-thirds of a turn
after it contacts the cylinder head.)
Tightening torque:
13 lbf·ft (18 N·m , 1.8 kgf·m)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Spark Plugs
Tighten the spark plugs caref ully. A
spark plug that is too loose can
overheat and damage the engine.
Overtightening can cause damage to
the threads in the cylinder head.
8. Install the ignition coil. Reinstall
the hexagon socket head cap bolt.
Specifications:
9. Push the wire connector onto the
ignition coil. Make sure it locks in
place.
NGK:
DENSO:
Premium model
10. Repeat this procedure for the
other five spark plugs.
PZFR5F-11
PKJ16CR-L11
Spark Plug Gap:
0.04 in (1.1 mm) +−00.1 mm
Type-S
11. Reinstall the cover on the front
cylinder bank while putting its
mounting clip in the hole on the
passenger’s side. Secure the cover
by turning the heads of the two
holding clips one-quarter turn
clockwise with a flat-tipped
screwdriver.
NGK:
DENSO:
PZFR6F-11
PKJ20CR-L11
Spark Plug Gap:
0.04 in (1.1 mm) +−00.1 mm
Maintenance
237
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Battery
BATTERY
COVER
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
Check the condition of your car’s
battery monthly. You should check
the color of the test indicator window,
and for corrosion on the terminals.
TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
To remove the battery cover, pull up
on the right side of the cover to
remove it from the bolt, then pull the
cover out.
Check the battery condition by
looking at the test indicator window
on the battery.
The label on the battery explains the
test indicator’s colors.
To reinstall the cover, insert the pins
on the left side of the cover into the
holes and put the cover over the
battery, then push the right side of
the cover over the bolt.
238
Maintenance
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Battery
Check the battery terminals for
corrosion (a white or yellowish
powder). To remove it, cover the
terminals with a solution of baking
soda and water. It will bubble up and
turn brown. When this stops, wash it
off with plain water. Dry off the
battery with a cloth or paper towel.
Coat the terminals with grease to
help prevent future corrosion.
WARNING: Battery posts,
terminals and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
If you need to connect the battery to
a charger, disconnect both cables to
prevent damage to the car’s
electrical system.
The battery gives off explosive
hydrogen gas during normal
operation.
If the terminals are severely corroded, clean them with baking soda
and water. Then use a wrench to
loosen and remove the cables from
the terminals. Always disconnect the
negative (−) cable first and reconnect it last. Clean the battery terminals with a terminal cleaning tool or
wire brush. Reconnect and tighten
the cables, then coat the terminals
with grease.
A spark or flame can cause the
battery to explode with enough
force to kill or seriously hurt you.
Wear protective clothing and a
face shield, or have a skilled
mechanic do the battery
maintenance.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
239
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Battery
If your car’s battery is disconnected
or goes dead, the audio system will
disable itself. The next time you turn
on the radio you will see ‘‘COdE’’ in
the frequency display. Use the
Preset buttons to enter the five-digit
code (see page 149 ).
240
Maintenance
Charging the battery with the cables
connected can seriously damage your
car’s electronic controls. Detach the
battery cables bef ore connecting the
battery to a charger.
If your car’s battery is disconnected
or goes dead, all stored driving
positions will be lost. To store the
driving positions again, see the
storing procedure on page 95 .
3.2 CL with Navigation System
The Navigation System will also
disable itself. The next time you turn
on the ignition switch, the system
will require you to enter a PIN
before it can be used. Refer to the
Navigation System Owner’s Manual.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Wiper Blades
Check the condition of the wiper
blades at least every six months.
Look for signs of cracking in the
rubber, or areas that are getting
hard. Replace the blades if you find
these signs, or they leave streaks
and unwiped areas when used.
LOCK
TAB
WIPER ARMS
2. Raise the wiper arm off the
windshield.
To replace the blade:
1. Turn the ignition ON (II), switch
the wipers to INT or − (low
position), then turn the ignition
OFF when the wiper arm is
approximately midway in its travel.
3. Disconnect the blade assembly
from the wiper arm by pushing in
the lock tab. Hold it in while you
push the blade assembly toward
the base of the arm.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
241
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Wiper Blades
BLADE
BLADE
6. Slide the new wiper blade into the
holder until the tabs lock.
7. Slide the wiper blade assembly
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it
locks in place.
8. Lower the wiper arm down against
the windshield.
REINFORCEMENT
4. Remove the blade from its holder
by grasping the tabbed end of the
blade. Pull firmly until the tabs
come out of the holder.
242
Maintenance
5. Examine the new wiper blades. If
they have no plastic or metal reinforcement along the back edge,
remove the metal reinforcement
strips from the old wiper blade and
install them in the slots along the
edge of the new blade.
9. Turn the ignition switch ON (II)
and return the windshield wipers
to their park position.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Air Conditioning System
If the air conditioning does not get as
cold as before, have your dealer
check the system. Recharge the
system with Refrigerant HFC-134a
(R-134a). (See Specifications on page
300 .)
Your car’s air conditioning is a sealed
system. Any major maintenance,
such as recharging, should be done
by a qualified mechanic. You can do
a couple of things to make sure the
air conditioning works efficiently.
Periodically check the engine’s
radiator and air conditioning
condenser for leaves, insects, and
dirt stuck to the front surface. These
block the air flow and reduce cooling
efficiency. Use a light spray from a
hose or a soft brush to remove them.
The condenser and radiator f ins bend
easily. Only use a low-pressure spray
or sof t-bristle brush to clean them.
AIR CONDITIONING CONDENSER
Run the air conditioning at least once
a week during the cold weather
months. Run it for at least ten
minutes while you are driving at a
steady speed with the engine at
normal operating temperature. This
circulates the lubricating oil contained in the refrigerant.
Whenever you have the air conditioning
system serviced, make sure the service
f acility uses a ref rigerant recycling
system. This system captures the
ref rigerant f or reuse. Releasing
ref rigerant into the atmosphere can
damage the environment.
Maintenance
243
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Dust and Pollen Filter, Drive Belts
Dust and Pollen Filter
The dust and pollen filter removes
pollen and dust that is brought in
from the outside through the climate
control system.
This filter should be replaced every
30,000 miles (48,000 km) under normal conditions. It should be replaced
every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) if you
drive primarily in urban areas that
have high concentrations of soot in
the air from industry and diesel-powered vehicles. Replace it more often
if air flow from the climate control
system becomes less than usual.
Have dust and pollen filter replaced
by your Acura dealer.
Drive Belts
POWER STEERING BELT
Power steering belt:
0.51−0.65 in (13.0−16.5 mm)
If you see signs of wear or looseness,
have your dealer adjust or replace
the belts.
ALTERNATOR BELT
Check the condition of the two drive
belts (power steering belt and
alternator belt). Examine the edges
of each belt for cracks or fraying.
Check the tension of the power
steering belt by pushing on it with
your thumb midway between the
pulleys.
244
Maintenance
The belt should have the following
‘‘play’’ or deflection.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Timing Belt, Tires
Timing Belt
The timing belt should normally be
replaced at the intervals shown in
the maintenance schedule.
Tires
To safely operate your car, your tires
must be the proper type and size, in
good condition with adequate tread,
and correctly inflated. The following
Replace this belt at 60,000 miles (U.S.) pages give more detailed information
on how and when to check air
or 100,000 km (Canada) if you
pressure, how to inspect your tires
regularly drive your car in one or
for damage and wear, and what to do
more of these conditions:
when your tires need to be replaced.
In very high temperatures
(over 110°F, 43°C).
In very low temperatures
Using tires that are excessively
(under −20°F, −29°C).
worn or improperly inflated can
cause a crash in which you can
be seriously hurt or killed.
Inflation
Keeping the tires properly inflated
provides the best combination of
handling, tread life and riding
comfort. Underinflated tires wear
unevenly, adversely affect handling
and fuel economy, and are more
likely to fail from being overheated.
Overinflated tires can make your car
ride more harshly, are more prone to
damage from road hazards, and wear
unevenly.
We recommend that you visually
check your tires every day. If you
think a tire might be low, check it
immediately with a tire gauge.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding tire
inflation and maintenance.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
245
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tires
Use a gauge to measure the air
pressure at least once a month. Even
tires that are in good condition may
lose one to two psi (10 to 20 kPa, 0.1
to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per month.
Remember to check the spare tire at
the same time you check all the
other tires.
Check the pressure in the tires when
they are cold. This means the car
has been parked for at least three
hours. If you have to drive the car
before checking the tire pressure,
the tires can still be considered
‘‘cold’’ if you drive less than 1 mile
(1.6 km).
If you check the pressure when the
tires are hot (the car has been driven
several miles), you will see readings
4 to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4
kgf/cm ) higher than the cold
reading. This is normal. Do not let
air out to match the specified cold
pressure. The tire will be
underinflated.
Recommended Tire Pressures for
Normal Driving
The following chart shows the
recommended cold tire pressures for
most normal driving conditions and
speeds. Tire pressures for high
speed driving are the same as for
normal driving.
Premium model
You should get your own tire
pressure gauge and use it whenever
you check your tire pressures. This
will make it easier for you to tell if a
pressure loss is due to a tire problem
and not due to a variation between
gauges.
Tire Size
P205/60R16 91V
Type-S
Tire Size
P215/50R17 93V
246
Maintenance
Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm )
Cold Tire Pressure
for Normal Driving
32 psi (220 kPa ,
2.2 kgf/cm )
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tires
The compact spare tire pressure is:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
These pressures are also given on
the tire information label on the
driver’s doorjamb.
Tubeless tires have some ability to
self-seal if they are punctured.
However, because leakage is often
very slow, you should look closely
for punctures if a tire starts losing
pressure.
Inspection
Every time you check inflation, you
should also examine the tires for
damage, foreign objects, and wear.
You should look for:
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS
Bumps or bulges in the tread or
side of the tire. Replace the tire if
you find either of these conditions.
Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
of the tire. Replace the tire if you
can see fabric or cord.
Excessive tread wear.
TREAD WEAR INDICATORS
Your car’s tires have wear indicators
molded into the tread. When the
tread wears down to that point, you
will see a 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide
band running across the tread. This
shows there is less than 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) of tread left on the tire. A
tire that is this worn gives very little
traction on wet roads. You should
replace the tire if you can see the
tread wear indicator in three or more
places around the tire.
Maintenance
247
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tires
Maintenance
In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
The tires were properly balanced by
the factory. They may need to be
rebalanced at some time before they
are worn out. Have your dealer
check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving. A tire
should always be rebalanced if it is
removed from the wheel for repair.
248
Maintenance
Make sure the installer balances the
wheels when you have new tires
installed. This increases riding
comfort and tire life. Your car’s
original tires were dynamic or ‘‘spin’’
balanced at the factory. For best
results, have the installer perform a
dynamic balance.
Improper wheel weights can damage
your car’s aluminum wheels. Use only
genuine Acura wheel weights f or
balancing.
Tire Rotation
Front
Front
(For Non-directional (For Directional
Tires and Wheels)
Tires and Wheels)
To help increase tire life and
distribute wear more evenly, you
should have the tires rotated every
7,500 miles (12,000 km). Move the
tires to the positions shown in the
chart each time they are rotated.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tires
When shopping for replacement
tires, you may find that some tires
are ‘‘directional.’’ This means they
are designed to rotate only in one
direction. If you use directional tires,
they should be rotated only front-toback.
Replacing Tires and Wheels
The tires that came with your car
were selected to match the performance capabilities of the car while
providing the best combination of
handling, ride comfort, and long life.
You should replace them with radial
tires of the same size, load range,
speed rating, and maximum cold tire
pressure rating (as shown on the
tire’s sidewall). Mixing radial and
bias-ply tires on your car can reduce
its braking ability, traction, and
steering accuracy.
Installing improper tires on your
car can affect handling and
stability. This can cause a crash
in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Always use the size and type of
tires recommended in this
owner’s manual.
It is best to replace all four tires at
the same time. If that is not possible
or necessary, then replace the two
front tires or the two rear tires as a
pair. Replacing just one tire can
seriously affect your car’s handling.
CONTINUED
Maintenance
249
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tires
The ABS and VSA system work by
comparing the speed of the wheels.
When replacing tires, use the same
size originally supplied with the car.
Tire size and construction can affect
wheel speed and may cause the
system to work inconsistently.
Wheels and Tires
Wheels:
If you ever need to replace a wheel,
make sure you use an identical style
aluminum alloy wheel that originally
came on your Acura. Replacement
wheels are available at your Acura
dealer.
Tires:
Premium model
16 x 6 1/2 JJ
Type-S
17 x 7 JJ
Premium model
P205/60R16 91V
Type-S
P215/50R17 93V
See page 308 for information about
DOT Tire Quality Grading.
250
Maintenance
Winter Driving
Tires that are marked ‘‘M+ S’’ or
‘‘All Season’’ on the sidewall have an
all-weather tread design. They
should be suitable for most winter
driving conditions. Tires without
these markings are designed for
optimum traction in dry conditions.
They may not provide adequate
performance in winter driving.
For the best performance in snowy
or icy conditions, you should install
snow tires or tire chains. They may
be required by local laws under
certain conditions.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Tires
Snow Tires
If you mount snow tires on your
Acura, make sure they are radial
tires of the same size and load range
as the original tires. Mount snow
tires on all four wheels to balance
your car’s handling in all weather
conditions. Keep in mind the traction
provided by snow tires on dry roads
may not be as high as your car’s
original equipment tires. You should
drive cautiously even when the roads
are clear. Check with the tire dealer
for maximum speed recommendations.
Tire Chains
Premium model only
Because your Acura has limited tire
clearance, mount only SAE Class ‘‘S’’
cable-type traction devices on the
front tires. Use traction devices only
when required by driving conditions
or local laws. Make sure they are the
correct size for your tires.
Metal link-type ‘‘chains’’ should not
be used. No matter how tight they
seem to be installed, they can come
into contact with the body and
suspension, causing serious damage.
Remove them as soon as you begin
driving on cleared roads.
Traction devices that are the wrong
size or improperly installed can
damage your car’s brake lines,
suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
driving if they are hitting any part of
the car.
Type-S
Do not install any types of chains or
cable-type traction devices on your
vehicle.
When installing cables, follow the
manufacturer’s instructions and
mount them as tightly as you can.
Drive slowly with them installed. If
you hear them coming in contact
with the body or chassis, stop and
investigate. Make sure the cables are
installed tightly, and that they are
not contacting the brake lines or
suspension.
Maintenance
251
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
Check the operation of your car’s
exterior lights at least once a month.
A burned out bulb can create an
unsafe condition by reducing your
car’s visibility and the ability to
signal your intentions to other
drivers.
HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHT
ROAD LAMP
252
Maintenance
LOW BEAM
HEADLIGHT
TURN SIGNAL/
PARKING LIGHT
SIDE MARKER LIGHT
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
Check the following:
TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
BACK-UP LIGHT
HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT
Headlights (low and high beam)
Road lamps
Parking lights
Taillights
Brake lights
Turn signals
Back-up lights
Hazard light function
License plate light
Side marker lights
High-mount brake light
Daytime running lights (Canadian
models)
If you find any bulbs are burned out,
replace them as soon as possible.
Refer to the chart on page 307 to
determine what type of replacement
bulb is needed.
LICENSE PLATE LIGHT
STOP/TAIL/SIDE MARKER LIGHTS
STOP/TAILLIGHTS
Maintenance
253
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
Headlight Aiming
The headlights were properly aimed
when your car was new. If you
regularly carry heavy items in the
trunk or pull a trailer, readjustment
may be required. Adjustment of the
headlights should be performed by
an Acura technician or other
qualified mechanic.
254
Maintenance
Replacing a High Beam Headlight
Bulb
The low beam headlight bulbs are a
type of high voltage discharge tube.
High voltage can remain in the
circuit even with the light switch off
and the key removed. Because of
this, you should not attempt to
examine or change a low beam
headlight bulb yourself. If a low
beam headlight bulb fails, take the
car to your dealer to have it replaced.
Halogen bulbs are used for the high
beam headlight bulbs. When
replacing a high beam headlight bulb,
handle it by its base and protect the
glass from contact with your skin or
hard objects. If you touch the glass,
clean it with denatured alcohol and a
clean cloth.
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot
when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to
overheat and shatter.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
1. Open the hood.
BULB
If you need to change a bulb on
the driver’s side, remove the
radiator reserve tank.
5. Push the electrical connector back
onto the bulb. Make sure it is on
all the way.
6. Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
2. Remove the electrical connector
from the bulb by squeezing the
connector to unlock the tab, then
slide the connector off the bulb.
7. (Driver’s side)
Reinstall the radiator reserve tank.
TAB
3. Remove the bulb by turning it
approximately one-quarter turn
counterclockwise.
4. Insert the new bulb into the hole
and turn it one-quarter turn clockwise to lock it in place.
Maintenance
255
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
5. Turn on the headlights to test the
new bulb.
Replacing a Road Lamp Bulb
6. Put the splash shield in place.
Reinstall the three holding clips.
Lock each clip in place by pushing
on the center.
HOLDING CLIPS
1. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the three holding clips
from the splash shield. Pull the
splash shield down.
3. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
2. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
4. Insert the socket and turn it onequarter turn clockwise to lock it in
place.
256
Maintenance
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
5. To remove the front turn signal/
parking light bulb, push it in
slightly and turn it
counterclockwise. To remove the
side marker bulb, pull it straight
out of its socket.
Replacing Front Turn Signal/
Parking and Side Marker Light
Bulbs
6. Install the new bulb into the
socket.
7. Insert the socket back into the
headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
HOLDING
CLIPS
8. Test the lights to make sure the
new bulb is working.
1. If you are changing the bulb on
the driver’s side, start the engine,
turn the steering wheel all the way
to the right, and turn off the
engine. If you are changing the
bulb on the passenger’s side, turn
the steering wheel to the left.
2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to
remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender.
3. Pull the inner fender cover away
from the fender and bumper.
9. Put the inner fender cover in place.
Install the two holding clips. Lock
each clip in place by pushing on
the center.
4. Remove the socket from the
headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
Maintenance
257
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
4. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket.
Push the new bulb straight into
the socket until it bottoms.
Replacing Rear Bulbs
5. Reinstall the socket into the light
assembly by turning it clockwise
until it locks.
FASTENER
CARGO NET
MOUNTING
BUTTON
1. Open the trunk.
Remove the fastener on the edge
of the trunk opening by turning it
counterclockwise with a coin.
Unscrew the cargo net mounting
button. Pull the lining back.
258
Maintenance
6. Test the lights to make sure the
new bulb is working.
2. Determine which of the four bulbs
is burned out: stop/taillight, stop/
tail/side marker light, back-up
light, or turn signal.
3. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
7. Reinstall the trunk lining. Make
sure it is installed under the edge
of the trunk seal.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
8. Put the fastener in the hole on the
side of the trunk lining and push
on the center until it locks (the
center is flush with the head).
Replacing a High-mount Brake
Light Bulb
3. Reinstall the socket. Turn it
clockwise until it locks.
4. Test the lights to make sure the
new bulb is working.
9. Screw the cargo net mounting
button back into the hole.
1. Open the trunk and remove the
socket from the light assembly by
turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
2. Remove the burned-out bulb by
pulling it straight out of the socket.
Install the new bulb in the socket.
Maintenance
259
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
Replacing a Rear License Plate
Bulb
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out. Push the new bulb
into the socket.
Replacing Bulbs in the Interior
Courtesy Lights
CEILING LIGHT
3. Put the lens back in place and
tighten the two screws securely.
SCREWS
1. Use a small Phillips-head
screwdriver to remove the two
screws. Remove the lens from the
license plate assembly.
The courtesy lights in the doors and
roof come apart the same way. They
do not use the same type of bulb.
1. Remove the lens by carefully
prying on the edge of the lens with
a fingernail file or a small flat-tip
screwdriver. Do not pry on the
edge of the housing around the
lens.
260
Maintenance
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
SPOTLIGHTS
DOOR LIGHT
Door light:
Pry on the top middle of the lens.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out of its metal tabs.
Ceiling light:
Pry on the front edge of the lens
near both sides.
3. Push the new bulb into the metal
tabs. Snap the lens back in place.
VANITY MIRROR LIGHT
Spotlights:
Pry on the front edge in front of
both spotlights.
Maintenance
261
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Lights
Replacing the Trunk Light Bulb
TRUNK LIGHT
3. Push the new bulb into the metal
tabs.
COVER
4. Push the cover back in place.
1. Open the trunk. Pull down the
trunk light cover.
2. Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out of its metal tabs.
262
Maintenance
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Storing Your Car
If you need to park your car for an
extended period (more than one
month), there are several things you
should do to prepare it for storage.
Proper preparation helps prevent
deterioration and makes it easier to
get your car back on the road. If
possible, store your car indoors.
Block the rear wheels.
If the car is to be stored for a
longer period, it should be
supported on jackstands so the
tires are off the ground.
Leave one window open slightly (if
the car is being stored indoors).
Fill the fuel tank.
Cover the car with a ‘‘breathable’’
cover, one made from a porous
material such as cotton.
Nonporous materials, such as
plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
which can damage the paint.
If possible, run the engine for a
while periodically (preferably once
a month).
Disconnect the battery.
Change the engine oil and filter
(see page 221 ).
Wash and dry the exterior
completely.
Clean the interior. Make sure the
carpeting, floor mats, etc. are
completely dry.
Leave the parking brake off. Put
the transmission in Park.
Support the front wiper blade
arms with a folded towel or rag so
they do not touch the windshield.
To minimize sticking, apply a
silicone spray lubricant to all door
and trunk seals. Also, apply a
vehicle body wax to the painted
surfaces that mate with the door
and trunk seals.
If you store your car for 12 months
or longer, have your Acura dealer
perform the inspections called for in
the 24 months/30,000 miles (48,000
km) maintenance schedule (Normal
Conditions) as soon as you take it
out of storage (see page 210 ). The
replacements called for in the
maintenance schedule are not
needed unless the car has actually
reached that time or mileage.
Maintenance
263
Main Menu
264
Main Menu
Appearance Care
Regular cleaning and polishing of
your Acura helps to keep it ‘‘new’’
looking. This section gives you hints
on how to clean your car and
preserve its appearance: the paint,
brightwork, wheels and interior. Also
included are several things you can
do to help prevent corrosion.
Exterior Care.................................. 266
Washing ...................................... 266
Waxing ........................................ 267
Aluminum Wheels ..................... 267
Paint Touch-up ........................... 267
Interior Care ................................... 268
Carpeting .................................... 268
Floor Mats .................................. 268
Fabric .......................................... 269
Vinyl ............................................ 269
Leather ........................................ 269
Seat Belts .................................... 269
Wood Trim ................................. 270
Windows ..................................... 270
Air Fresheners ........................... 270
Corrosion Protection ..................... 271
Body Repairs .................................. 272
Appearance Care
265
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Exterior Care
Washing
Frequent washing helps preserve
your car’s beauty. Dirt and grit can
scratch the paint, while tree sap and
bird droppings can permanently ruin
the finish.
Wash your car in a shady area, not in
direct sunlight. If the car is parked in
the sun, move it into the shade and
let the exterior cool down before you
start.
Only use the solvents and cleaners
recommended in this Owner’s
Manual.
Chemical solvents and strong cleaners
can damage the paint, metal, and
plastic on your car.
266
Appearance Care
Rinse the car thoroughly with cool
water to remove loose dirt.
Fill a bucket with cool water. Mix
in a mild detergent, such as
dishwashing liquid or a product
made especially for car washing.
Wash the car using the water and
detergent solution and a softbristle brush, sponge, or soft cloth.
Start at the top and work your way
down. Rinse frequently.
Check the body for road tar, tree
sap, etc. Remove these stains with
tar remover or turpentine. Rinse it
off immediately so it does not
harm the finish. Remember to rewax these areas, even if the rest of
the car does not need waxing.
When you have washed and rinsed
the whole exterior, dry it with a
chamois or soft towel. Letting it
air-dry will cause dulling and water
spots.
As you dry the car, inspect it for
chips and scratches that could allow
corrosion to start. Repair them with
touch-up paint (see page 267 ).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Exterior Care
Waxing
Always wash and dry the whole car
before waxing it. You should wax
your car, including the metal trim,
whenever water sits on the surface
in large patches. It should form into
beads or droplets after waxing.
You should use a quality liquid or
paste wax. Apply it according to the
instructions on the container. In
general, there are two types of
products:
Waxes − A wax coats the finish and
protects it from damage by exposure
to sunlight, air pollution, etc. You
should use a wax on your Acura
when it is new.
Polishes − Polishes and cleaner/
waxes can restore the shine to paint
that has oxidized and lost some of its
shine. They normally contain mild
abrasives and solvents that remove
the top layer of the finish. You
should use a polish on your Acura if
the finish does not have its original
shine after using a wax.
Cleaning tar, insects, etc. with
removers also takes off the wax.
Remember to re-wax those areas,
even if the rest of the car does not
need waxing.
Aluminum Wheels
Clean your Acura’s aluminum alloy
wheels as you do the rest of the
exterior. Wash them with the same
solution, and rinse them thoroughly.
Paint Touch-up
Your dealer has touch-up paint to
match your car’s color. The color
code is printed on a sticker on the
driver’s doorjamb. Take this code to
your dealer so you are sure to get
the correct color.
Inspect your car frequently for chips
or scratches in the paint. Repair
them right away to prevent corrosion
of the metal underneath. Use the
touch-up paint only on small chips
and scratches. More extensive paint
damage should be repaired by a
professional.
The wheels have a protective clearcoat that keeps the aluminum from
corroding and tarnishing. Using
harsh chemicals, including some
commercial wheel cleaners, or stiff
brushes can damage this clear-coat.
Only use a mild detergent and soft
brush or sponge to clean the wheels.
Appearance Care
267
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Interior Care
Carpeting
Vacuum the carpeting frequently to
remove dirt. Ground-in dirt will make
the carpet wear out faster.
Periodically shampoo the carpet to
keep it looking new. Use one of the
foam-type carpet cleaners on the
market. Follow the instructions that
come with the cleaner, applying it
with a sponge or soft brush. Keep
the carpeting as dry as possible by
not adding water to the foam.
Floor Mats
If you replace it, use a genuine Acura
floor mat that is designed to be used
with the floor mat anchor in your car.
If you use a non-Acura floor mat in
the driver’s footwell, make sure it
fits properly and that it can be used
with the floor mat anchor.
The genuine Acura driver’s floor mat
that came with your car was
designed to be hooked over the floor
mat anchor. This keeps the floor mat
from sliding forward and possibly
interfering with the pedals.
268
Appearance Care
If you remove the floor mat, make
sure to re-anchor it when you put it
back in your car.
Do not put additional floor mats on
top of the anchored mat, otherwise
the additional mats may slide
forward and interfere with the pedals.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Interior Care
Fabric
Vacuum dirt and dust out of the
material frequently. For general
cleaning, use a solution of mild soap
and lukewarm water, letting it air dry.
To clean off stubborn spots, use a
commercially-available fabric cleaner.
Test it on a hidden area of the fabric
first, to make sure it does not bleach
or stain the fabric. Follow the
instructions that come with the
cleaner.
Vinyl
Remove dirt and dust with a vacuum
cleaner. Wipe the vinyl with a soft
cloth dampened in a solution of mild
soap and water. Use the same
solution with a soft-bristle brush on
more difficult spots. You can also use
commercially-available spray or
foam-type vinyl cleaners.
Leather
Vacuum dirt and dust from the
leather frequently. Pay particular
attention to the pleats and seams.
Clean the leather with a soft cloth
dampened with clear water, then
buff it with a clean, dry cloth. If
further cleaning is needed, use a
soap specifically for leather, such as
saddle soap. Apply this soap with a
damp, soft cloth. Wipe down and
buff as described above.
Seat Belts
LOOP
If your seat belts get dirty, you can
use a soft brush with a mixture of
mild soap and warm water to clean
them. Do not use bleach, dye, or
cleaning solvents. They can weaken
the belt material. Let the belts airdry before you use the car.
CONTINUED
Appearance Care
269
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Interior Care
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of
the loops with a clean cloth
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol.
Wood Trim
Clean the wood trim with a soft cloth
dipped in clear water and wipe it dry
with another soft cloth. Soap may
leave a film that dulls the finish.
Windows
Clean the windows, inside and out,
with a commercially-available glass
cleaner. You can also use a mixture
of one part white vinegar to ten parts
water. This will remove the haze that
builds up on the inside of the
windows. Use a soft cloth or paper
towels to clean all glass and clear
plastic surfaces.
The rear window def ogger and
antenna wires are bonded to the inside
of the glass. Wiping vigorously up-anddown can dislodge and break these
wires. When cleaning the rear window,
use gentle pressure and wipe side-toside.
270
Appearance Care
Air Fresheners
If you want to use an air freshener/
deodorizer in the interior of your car,
it is best to use a solid type. Some
liquid air fresheners contain chemicals that may cause parts of the
interior trim and fabric to crack or
discolor.
If you use a liquid air freshener,
make sure you fasten it securely so it
does not spill as you drive.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Corrosion Protection
Two factors normally contribute to
causing corrosion in your car:
1. Moisture trapped in body cavities.
Dirt and road salt that collects in
hollows on the underside of the
car stays damp, promoting
corrosion in that area.
2. Removal of paint and protective
coatings from the exterior and
underside of the car.
Many corrosion-preventive measures
are built into your Acura. You can
help keep your car from corroding
by performing some simple periodic
maintenance:
Repair chips and scratches in the
paint as soon as you discover them.
Inspect and clean out the drain
holes in the bottom of the doors
and body.
Use a high-pressure spray to clean
the underside of your car. This is
especially important in areas that
use road salt in winter. It is also a
good idea in humid climates and
areas subject to salt air. Be careful
of the ABS wheel sensors and
wiring at each wheel.
Have the corrosion-preventive
coatings on the underside of your
car inspected and repaired
periodically.
Check the floor coverings for
dampness. Carpeting and floor
mats may remain damp for a long
time, especially in winter. This
dampness can eventually cause
the floor panels to corrode.
Appearance Care
271
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Body Repairs
Body repairs can affect your car’s
resistance to corrosion. If your car
needs repairs after a collision, pay
close attention to the parts used in
the repair and the quality of the
work.
Make sure the repair facility uses
genuine Acura replacement body
parts. Some companies make sheet
metal pieces that seem to duplicate
the original Acura body parts, but
are actually inferior in fit, finish, and
corrosion resistance. Once installed,
they do not give the same highquality appearance.
272
Appearance Care
When reporting your collision to the
insurance company, tell them you
want genuine Acura parts used in the
repair. Although most insurers
recognize the quality of original
parts, some may try to specify that
the repairs be done with other
available parts. You should investigate this before any repairs have
begun.
Take your car to your authorized
Acura dealer for inspection after the
repairs are completed. Your dealer
can make sure that quality materials
were used, and that corrosionpreventive coatings were applied to
all repaired and replaced parts.
Main Menu
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the morecommon problems that motorists
experience with their vehicles. It
gives you information about how to
safely evaluate the problem and what
to do to correct it. If the problem has
stranded you on the side of the road,
you may be able to get going again.
If not, you will also find instructions
on getting your car towed.
Compact Spare Tire....................... 274
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 275
If Your Engine Won’t Start ........... 280
Nothing Happens or the
Starter Motor Operates
Very Slowly......................... 281
The Starter Operates
Normally ................................. 282
Jump Starting ................................. 283
If Your Engine Overheats............. 286
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 288
Charging System Indicator........... 289
Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 290
Readiness Codes ........................ 291
Brake System Indicator ................ 292
Closing the Moonroof ................... 293
Fuses ............................................... 294
Checking and Replacing ........... 295
Emergency Towing ....................... 300
Taking Care of the Unexpected
273
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Compact Spare Tire
Your car has a compact spare tire
that takes up less space. Use this
spare tire as a temporary replacement only. Get your regular tire
repaired or replaced and put it back
on your car as soon as you can.
Check the inflation pressure of the
compact spare tire every time you
check the other tires. It should be
inflated to:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Follow these precautions whenever
you are using the compact spare tire:
Do not mount snow chains on the
compact spare.
The wheel of the compact spare
tire is designed especially to fit
your car. Do not use your spare
tire on another vehicle unless it is
the same make and model.
On Premium model
Turn off the Traction Control
System (see page 191 ). Driving
with the compact spare tire may
activate the TCS.
On Type-S
Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
under any circumstances.
This tire gives a harsher ride and
less traction on some road surfaces than the regular tire. Use
greater caution while driving on
this tire.
274
Taking Care of the Unexpected
INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
Turn off the VSA system (see
page 194 ).
Driving with the compact spare
tire may activate the VSA system.
TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
The compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular tire. Replace
it when you can see the tread wear
indicator bars. The replacement
should be the same size and design
tire, mounted on the same wheel.
The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
wheel, and the compact wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
If you have a flat tire while driving,
stop in a safe place to change it.
Stopping in traffic or on the shoulder
of a busy road is dangerous. Drive
slowly along the shoulder until you
get to an exit or an area to stop that
is far away from the traffic lanes.
The car can easily roll off the
jack, seriously injuring anyone
underneath.
Follow the directions for
changing a tire exactly, and
never get under the car when it
is supported only by the jack.
1. Park the car on firm, level, and
non-slippery ground away from
traffic. Put the transmission in
Park. Apply the parking brake.
If you are towing a trailer, unhitch
the trailer.
HANDLE
HANDLE
TRUNK FLOOR
JACK
SPARE TIRE
2. Turn on the hazard warning lights
and turn the ignition switch to
LOCK (0). Have all the
passengers get out of the car while
you change the tire.
TOOL BOX
4. The tools are in the tool box on
the right side of the trunk. Take
the tools out of the tool box.
5. Unscrew the wing bolt and take
the spare tire out of its well.
3. Open the trunk. Raise the trunk
floor lid by pulling up on the
handle. To keep the lid out of the
way, hook the handle on the upper
frame of the trunk opening.
CONTINUED
Taking Care of the Unexpected
275
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
JACK
WHEEL WRENCH
6. The jack is behind a cover in the
right fender. Remove the cover by
turning the handle counterclockwise, then pulling on the cover.
276
Taking Care of the Unexpected
7. Turn the jack’s end bracket
counterclockwise to loosen it, then
remove the jack.
8. Loosen the five wheel nuts 1/2
turn with the wheel wrench.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
EXTENSION
JACKING POINT
9. Locate the jacking point nearest
the tire you need to change. It is
pointed to by a △ mark molded
into the underside of the body.
Place the jack under the jacking
point. Turn the end bracket
clockwise until the top of the jack
contacts the jacking point. Make
sure the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
WHEEL
WRENCH
10.Use the extension and wheel
wrench as shown to raise the
vehicle until the flat tire is off the
ground.
11.Remove the wheel nuts and flat
tire. Temporarily place the flat tire
on the ground with the outside
surface of the wheel facing up.
You could scratch the wheel if you
put it face down.
CONTINUED
Taking Care of the Unexpected
277
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
BRAKE HUB
12.Before mounting the spare tire,
wipe any dirt off the mounting
surface of the wheel and hub with
a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully, it may be hot from
driving.
278
Taking Care of the Unexpected
13.Put on the spare tire. Put the
wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten
them fully.
14.Lower the car to the ground and
remove the jack.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire
WING BOLT
SPACER CONE
CENTER CAP
15.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in
the same crisscross pattern. Have
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service
facility.
Tighten the wheel nuts to:
80 lbf·ft (108 N·m , 11 kgf·m)
16.Remove the center cap before
storing the flat tire in the trunk
well.
17.Place the flat tire face down in the
spare tire well.
18.Remove the spacer cone from the
wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
back on the bolt.
19.Secure the flat tire by screwing
the wing bolt back into its hole.
CONTINUED
Taking Care of the Unexpected
279
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Changing a Flat Tire, If Your Engine Won’t Start
20.Store the jack in its holder. Turn
the jack’s end bracket to lock it in
place. Replace the cover. Store the
tools.
21.Store the center cap in the trunk.
Make sure it does not get scratched or damaged.
22.Unhook the handle from the trunk
opening and lower the floor lid.
Loose items can fly around the
interior in a crash and could
seriously injure the occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools
securely before driving.
280
Taking Care of the Unexpected
23.Close the trunk lid.
If Your Engine Won’t Start
Diagnosing why your engine won’t
start falls into two areas, depending
on what you hear when you turn the
key to START (III):
You hear nothing, or almost
nothing. The engine’s starter
motor does not operate at all, or
operates very slowly.
You can hear the starter motor
operating normally, or the starter
motor sounds like it is spinning
faster than normal, but the engine
does not start up and run.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If Your Engine Won’t Start
Nothing Happens or the Starter
Motor Operates Very Slowly
When you turn the ignition switch to
START (III), you do not hear the
normal noise of the engine trying to
start. You may hear a clicking sound
or series of clicks, or nothing at all.
Check these things:
Check the transmission interlock.
The transmission must be in Park
or Neutral or the starter will not
operate.
Turn the ignition switch to START
(III). If the headlights do not dim,
check the condition of the fuses. If
the fuses are OK, there is probably something wrong with the
electrical circuit for the ignition
switch or starter motor. You will
need a qualified technician to
determine the problem. (See
Emergency Towing on page 300 .)
If the headlights dim noticeably or
go out when you try to start the
engine, either the battery is discharged or the connections are
corroded. Check the condition of
the battery and terminal connections (see page 238 ). You can
then try jump starting the car from
a booster battery (see page 283 ).
Turn the ignition switch to ON (II).
Turn on the headlights and check
their brightness. If the headlights
are very dim or don’t light at all,
the battery is discharged. See
Jump Starting on page 283 .
Taking Care of the Unexpected
281
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If Your Engine Won’t Start
The Starter Operates Normally
In this case, the starter motor’s
speed sounds normal, or even faster
than normal, when you turn the
ignition switch to START (III), but
the engine does not run.
Your car has the Immobilizer
System. You should use a
properly-coded master or valet key
to start the engine (see page 74 ).
A key that is not properly coded
will cause the immobilizer system
indicator in the dash panel to blink
rapidly.
Are you using the proper starting
procedure? Refer to Starting the
Engine on page 177 .
282
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Do you have fuel? Turn the
ignition switch to ON (II) for a
minute and watch the fuel gauge.
The low fuel level warning light
may not be working, so you were
not reminded to fill the tank.
There may be an electrical
problem, such as no power to the
fuel pump. Check all the fuses
(see page 294 ).
If you find nothing wrong, you will
need a qualified technician to find
the problem. See Emergency
Towing on page 300 .
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Jump Starting
If your car’s battery has run down,
you may be able to start the engine
by using a booster battery. Although
this seems like a simple procedure,
you should take several precautions.
A battery can explode if you do
not follow the correct procedure,
seriously injuring anyone
nearby.
If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
electrolyte inside can f reeze.
Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
battery can cause it to rupture.
Keep all sparks, open flames,
and smoking materials away
from the battery.
2. Turn off all the electrical accessories: climate control, stereo
system, lights, etc.
Put the transmission in Neutral or
Park, and set the parking brake.
You cannot start your Acura by
pushing or pulling it.
3. Remove the battery cover (see
page 238 ).
To jump start your car, follow these
directions closely:
1. Open the hood and check the
physical condition of the battery
(see page 238 ). In very cold
weather, check the condition of
the electrolyte. If it seems slushy
or like ice, do not try jump starting
until it thaws.
CONTINUED
Taking Care of the Unexpected
283
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Jump Starting
Premium model
4. Connect one jumper cable to the
positive (+) terminal on your
Acura’s battery. Connect the other
end to the positive (+) terminal
on the booster battery.
284
Taking Care of the Unexpected
5. Connect the second jumper cable
to the negative (−) terminal on
the booster battery. Connect the
other end to the grounding strap
as shown. Do not connect this
jumper cable to any other part of
the engine.
Type-S
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Jump Starting
7. Start your car. If the starter motor
still operates slowly, check the
jumper cable connections to make
sure they have good metal-tometal contact.
8. Once your car is running, disconnect the negative cable from your
car, then from the booster battery.
Disconnect the positive cable from
your car, then the booster battery.
BOOSTER BATTERY
The numbers in the illustration show
you the order to connect the jumper
cables.
Keep the ends of the jumper cables
away from each other and any metal
on the vehicle until all are
disconnected. Otherwise, you may
cause an electrical short.
6. If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
285
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If Your Engine Overheats
The pointer of your car’s temperature gauge should stay in the midrange under most conditions. It may
go higher if you are driving up a long
steep hill on a very hot day. If it
climbs to the red mark, you should
determine the reason.
Driving with the temperature gauge
pointer at the red mark can cause
serious damage to your engine.
Your car can overheat for several
reasons, such as lack of coolant or a
mechanical problem. The only
indication may be the temperature
gauge climbing to or above the red
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood.
In either case, you should take
immediate action.
Steam and spray from an
overheated engine can
seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam
is coming out.
286
Taking Care of the Unexpected
1. Safely pull to the side of the road.
Put the transmission in Neutral or
Park and set the parking brake.
Turn off the climate control and all
other accessories. Turn on the
hazard warning indicators.
2. If you see steam and/or spray
coming from under the hood, turn
off the engine.
3. If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading
(climbing a long, steep hill on a
hot day with the A/C running, for
example), the engine should start
to cool down almost immediately.
If it does, wait until the temperature gauge comes down to the midpoint then continue driving.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
If Your Engine Overheats
4. If the temperature gauge stays at
the red mark, turn off the engine.
5. Wait until you see no more signs
of steam or spray, then open the
hood.
6. Look for any obvious coolant leaks,
such as a split radiator hose.
Everything is still extremely hot,
so use caution. If you find a leak, it
must be repaired before you
continue driving (see Emergency
Towing on page 300 ).
7. If you don’t find an obvious leak,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank (see page
167 ). If the level is below the
MIN mark, add coolant to halfway
between the MIN and MAX marks.
8. If there was no coolant in the
reserve tank, you may also have to
add coolant to the radiator. Let the
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the temperature gauge, or lower, before checking the radiator.
Removing the radiator cap
while the engine is hot can
cause the coolant to spray out,
seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and
radiator cool down before
removing the radiator cap.
9. Using gloves or a large heavy
cloth, turn the radiator cap
counterclockwise, without pushing
down, to the first stop. This
releases any remaining pressure in
the cooling system. After the
pressure releases, push down on
the cap and turn it until it comes
off.
10.Start the engine and set the
temperature control dial to
maximum (climate control to
FULL AUTO at 90°F/32°C). Add
coolant to the radiator up to the
base of the filler neck. If you do
not have the proper coolant
mixture available, you can add
plain water. Remember to have
the cooling system drained and
refilled with the proper mixture as
soon as you can.
11.Put the radiator cap back on
tightly. Run the engine and watch
the temperature gauge. If it goes
back to the red mark, the engine
needs repair. (See Emergency
Towing on page 300 .)
12.If the temperature stays normal,
check the coolant level in the
radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
287
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Low Oil Pressure Indicator
Running the engine with low oil
pressure can cause serious mechanical
damage almost immediately. Turn of f
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get
the car stopped.
1. Safely pull off the road and shut
off the engine. Turn on the hazard
warning indicators.
LOW OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR
This indicator should light when the
ignition switch is ON (II), and go out
after the engine starts. It should
never come on when the engine is
running. If it starts flashing, it
indicates that the oil pressure
dropped very low for a moment, then
recovered. If the indicator stays on
with the engine running, it shows
that the engine has lost oil pressure
and serious engine damage is
possible. In either case, you should
take immediate action.
288
Taking Care of the Unexpected
2. Let the car sit for a minute. Open
the hood and check the oil level
(see page 165 ). Although oil level
and oil pressure are not directly
connected, an engine that is very
low on oil can lose pressure during
cornering and other driving
maneuvers.
3. If necessary, add oil to bring the
level back to the full mark on the
dipstick (see page 219 ).
4. Start the engine and watch the oil
pressure indicator. If the light
does not go out within ten seconds,
turn off the engine. There is a
mechanical problem that needs to
be repaired before you can
continue driving. (See Emergency
Towing on page 300 .)
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Charging System Indicator
Immediately turn off all electrical
accessories: radio, climate control,
rear defogger, cruise control, etc.
Try not to use other electricallyoperated controls such as the power
windows. Keep the engine running
and take extra care not to stall it.
Starting the engine will discharge
the battery rapidly.
By eliminating as much of the
electrical load as possible, you can
drive several miles (kilometers)
before the battery is too discharged
to keep the engine running. Drive to
a service station or garage where
you can get technical assistance.
CHARGING SYSTEM INDICATOR
This indicator should come on when
the ignition switch is ON (II), and go
out after the engine starts. If it
comes on brightly when the engine
is running, it indicates that the
charging system has stopped
charging the battery.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
289
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LAMP
This indicator comes on when you
turn the ignition switch ON (II) and
goes off after the engine starts. If it
comes on at any other time, it
indicates one of the engine’s
emissions control systems may have
a problem. Even though you may
feel no difference in your car’s performance, it can reduce your fuel
economy and cause your car to put
out excessive emissions. Continued
operation may cause serious damage.
290
Taking Care of the Unexpected
If you have recently refueled your
car, the cause of this indicator
coming on could be a loose or
missing fuel fill cap. Check the cap
and tighten it until it clicks several
times. Replace the fuel fill cap if it is
missing. Tightening the cap will not
make the indicator turn off
immediately; it takes at least three
driving trips.
If the indicator remains on past three
driving trips, or the fuel cap was not
loose or missing, have the car
checked by the dealer as soon as
possible. Drive moderately until the
dealer has inspected the problem.
Avoid full-throttle acceleration and
driving at high speed.
You should also have the dealer
inspect your car if this indicator
comes on repeatedly, even though it
may turn off as you continue driving.
If you keep driving with the
malf unction indicator lamp on, you can
damage your car’s emissions controls
and engine. Those repairs may not be
covered by your car’s warranties.
This indicator may also come on
along with the ‘‘D5 ’’ indicator.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Readiness Codes
Your car has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
If your car’s battery has been
disconnected or gone dead, these
codes are erased. It takes several
days of driving under various
conditions to set the codes again.
If possible, do not take your car for a
state emissions test until the
readiness codes are set. Refer to
State Emissions Testing for more
information. (See page 315 .)
To check if they are set, turn the
ignition ON (II), but do not start the
engine. The Malfunction Indicator
Lamp will come on for 20 seconds. If
it then goes off, the readiness codes
are set. If it blinks 5 times, the
readiness codes are not set.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
291
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Brake System Indicator
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR*
*
U.S. indicator shown
The Brake System Indicator
normally comes on when you turn
the ignition switch ON (II). It is a
reminder to check the parking brake.
It comes on and stays lit if you do not
fully release the parking brake.
292
Taking Care of the Unexpected
If it comes on at any other time, it
indicates a problem with the car’s
brake system. In most cases, the
problem is a low fluid level in the
brake fluid reservoir. Press lightly on
the brake pedal to see if it feels
normal. If it does, check the brake
fluid level the next time you stop at a
service station (see page 231 ). If the
fluid level is low, take the car to your
dealer and have the brake system
inspected for leaks or worn brake
pads.
Slow down by shifting to a lower
gear, and pull to the side of the road
when it is safe. Because of the
longer distance needed to stop, it is
hazardous to drive the car. You
should have it towed, and repaired as
soon as possible. (See Emergency
Towing on page 300 .)
However, if the brake pedal does not
feel normal, you should take
immediate action. Because of the
brake system’s dual-circuit design, a
problem in one part of the system
will still give you braking at two
wheels. You will feel the brake pedal
go down much farther before the car
begins to slow down, and you will
have to press harder on the pedal.
The distance needed to stop will be
much longer.
If the ABS indicator and the VSA
system indicator come on with this
indicator, have the car inspected by
your dealer immediately.
If you must drive the car a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and cautiously.
On Type-S
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Closing the Moonroof
If the electric motor will not close
the moonroof, do the following:
1. Check the fuse for the moonroof
motor (see page 294 ). If the fuse
is blown, replace it with one of the
same or lower rating.
ROUND
PLUG
NOTCH
TAB
SOCKET
2. Try closing the moonroof. If the
new fuse blows immediately or the
moonroof motor still does not
operate, you can close the
moonroof manually.
3. Get the moonroof wrench out of
the tool kit in the trunk.
4. To remove the round plug in the
center of the headliner, turn the
plug by using a screwdriver or
coin and pry it off. Make sure to
align the tabs on the round plug to
the notches on the ceilling as
shown in the illustration.
5. Insert the moonroof wrench into
the socket behind this plug. Turn
the wrench until the moonroof is
fully closed.
6. Remove the wrench. Replace the
round plug.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
293
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fuses
All the electrical circuits in your car
have fuses to protect them from a
short circuit or overload. These
fuses are located in three fuse boxes.
VSA FUSE BOX
UNDER-HOOD
TAB
INTERIOR
On Type-S
The interior fuse boxes are located
on each side of the dashboard. To
open an interior fuse box, open the
car door. Pull the bottom of the
cover open, then take it out of its
side hinges by pulling it toward you.
294
Taking Care of the Unexpected
The VSA fuse box is located under
the interior fuse box on the
passenger’s side of the dashboard.
To open it, push the tab and pull up
the left side of the cover as shown.
The under-hood fuse box is located
in the back of the engine compartment on the passenger’s side. To
open it, push the tabs as shown.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fuses
Checking and Replacing Fuses
If something electrical in your car
stops working, the first thing you
should check for is a blown fuse.
Determine from the chart on pages
297 − 299 , or the diagram on the
fuse box lid, which fuse or fuses
control that component. Check those
fuses first, but check all the fuses
before deciding that a blown fuse is
not the cause. Replace any blown
fuses and check the component’s
operation.
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK
(0). Make sure the headlights and
all other accessories are off.
2. Remove the cover from the fuse
box.
FUSE
FUSE
PULLER
BLOWN
3. Check each of the large fuses in
the under-hood fuse box by
looking through the top at the wire
inside. Removing these fuses
requires a Phillips-head screwdriver.
4. Check the smaller fuses in the
under-hood fuse box and all the
fuses in the interior fuse boxes by
pulling out each fuse with the fuse
puller provided in the under-hood
fuse box.
CONTINUED
Taking Care of the Unexpected
295
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fuses
BLOWN
5. Look for a burned wire inside the
fuse. If it is burned, replace it with
one of the spare fuses of the same
rating or lower.
If you cannot drive the car without
fixing the problem, and you do not
have a spare fuse, take a fuse of the
same rating or a lower rating from
one of the other circuits. Make sure
you can do without that circuit
temporarily (such as the accessory
power socket or radio).
If you replace the blown fuse with a
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it
might blow out again. This does not
indicate anything wrong. Replace the
fuse with one of the correct rating as
soon as you can.
Replacing a f use with one that has a
higher rating greatly increases the
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a replacement f use with the proper rating f or the
circuit, install one with a lower rating.
6. If the replacement fuse of the
same rating blows in a short time,
there is probably a serious
electrical problem in your car.
Leave the blown fuse in that
circuit and have your car checked
by a qualified mechanic.
If the radio fuse is removed, the
audio system will disable itself. The
next time you turn on the radio you
will see ‘‘
’’ in the frequency
display. Use the Preset buttons to
enter the five-digit code (see page
149 ).
296
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fuses
UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX
No. Amps.
1*1
1*2
2
3
4
5
6*1
6*2
7
8
9
10
11
12
20 A
30 A
7.5 A
60 A
40 A
40 A
20 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
40 A
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
Circuits Protected
Condenser Fan
Condenser Fan
MG Clutch
IG1 Main
Rear Window Defogger
Heater Motor
TCS
VSA
Power Seat
Power Window Motor
Back Up, ACC
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
No. Amps.
13*1
13*2
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
20 A
30 A
120 A
30 A
20 A
15 A
30 A
15 A
20 A
20 A
20 A
−
20 A
Circuits Protected
Cooling Fan
Cooling Fan
Battery
Spare Fuse
Spare Fuse
Hazard
ABS Motor
ACG S
Stop
ABS F/S Relay
Right Headlight
Not Used
Left Headlight
*1 : Premium model
*2 : Type-S
CONTINUED
Taking Care of the Unexpected
297
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fuses
INTERIOR FUSE BOXES
DRIVER’S SIDE
Front ←
PASSENGER’S SIDE
No. Amps.
1
2
3
15 A
10 A
7.5 A
4
7.5 A
5
6
7.5 A
15 A
7
8
9
7.5 A
7.5 A
7.5 A
10
11
12
13
7.5 A
15 A
30 A
7.5 A
Circuits Protected
Fuel Pump
Main SRS
Heater Control, A/C Clutch
Relay, Cooling Fan Relay
Mirror, Heated Seat, Heated
Mirror
Daytime Running Lights*
ECU (PCM), Cruise Control,
VSA
Side SRS
ACC Relay, Navigation
Instrument Panel, Back-up
Lights, Memory Seat
Turn Signals
IG Coil
Wiper, Washer
Starter Signal
* : On Canadian models
→ Front
No. Amps.
1
2
30 A
20 A
3
4
20 A
20 A
5
6
7
8
9
10
20 A
20 A
11
7.5 A
12
13
14
15
16
20 A
15 A
7.5 A
20 A
−
20 A
20 A
10 A
−
Circuits Protected
Moonroof Motor
Driver’s Power Seat
Reclining, Memory Seat
Heated Seat
Driver’s Power Seat Sliding,
Memory Seat
Passenger’s Power Seat Sliding
Passenger’s Power Seat Reclining
Not Used
Right Power Window
Radio, Power Outlet
Navigation System, Daytime
Running Lights*
Interior Light, Seat Memory,
HomeLink
Power Door Locks
Clock, Back Up, Small Light
ABS Motor Check
Driver’s Power Window
Not Used
* : On Canadian models
298
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Fuses
VSA FUSE BOX
On Type-S
No. Amps.
1
2
3
20 A
20 A
−
Circuits Protected
VSA F/S Relay
VSA Throttle Motor
Not Used
Taking Care of the Unexpected
299
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Emergency Towing
If your car needs to be towed, call a
professional towing service or, if you
belong to one, an organization that
provides roadside assistance. Never
tow your car behind another vehicle
with just a rope or chain. It is very
dangerous.
There are three popular types of
professional towing equipment.
Flat-bed Equipment − The operator
loads your car on the back of a truck.
This is the best way to transport
your Acura.
Wheel-lift Equipment − The tow
truck uses two pivoting arms that go
under the tires (front or rear) and lift
them off the ground. The other two
tires remain on the ground. This is
an acceptable way to tow your
Acura.
300
Taking Care of the Unexpected
Sling-type Equipment − The tow
truck uses metal cables with hooks
on the ends. These hooks go around
parts of the frame or suspension and
the cables lift that end of the car off
the ground. Your car’s suspension
and body can be seriously damaged.
This method of towing is
unacceptable.
If your Acura cannot be transported
by flat-bed, it should be towed by
wheel-lift equipment with the front
wheels off the ground. If, due to
damage, your car must be towed
with the front wheels on the ground,
do the following.
Release the parking brake.
Start the engine.
Shift to D5, then to N.
Turn off the engine.
Improper towing preparation will
damage the transmission. Follow the
above procedure exactly. If you cannot
shif t the transmission or start the
engine, your car must be transported
with the f ront wheels of f the ground.
With the front wheels on the ground,
it is best to tow the car no farther
than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the
speed below 35 mph (55 km/h).
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Emergency Towing
If you decide to tow your car with all
four wheels on the ground, make
sure you use a properly-designed and
attached tow bar. Prepare the car for
towing as described above, and leave
the ignition switch in Accessory (I)
so the steering wheel does not lock.
Make sure the radio and any items
plugged into the accessory power
socket are turned off so they do not
run down the battery.
Trying to lif t or tow your car by the
bumpers will cause serious damage.
The bumpers are not designed to
support the car’s weight.
The steering system can be damaged if
the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
ignition switch in Accessory (I), and
make sure the steering wheel turns
f reely bef ore you begin towing.
Taking Care of the Unexpected
301
Main Menu
302
Main Menu
Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give
you the dimensions and capacities of
your Acura, and the locations of the
identification numbers. It also
includes information you should
know about your vehicle’s tires and
emissions control systems.
Identification Numbers ................. 304
Specifications ................................. 306
DOT Tire Quality Grading
(U.S. Cars) .............................. 308
Treadwear .................................. 308
Traction....................................... 308
Temperature .............................. 309
Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 310
Driving in Foreign Countries ....... 311
Emissions Controls........................ 312
The Clean Air Act ...................... 312
Crankcase Emissions Control
System..................................... 312
Evaporative Emissions Control
System..................................... 312
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery ................................. 312
Exhaust Emissions Controls .... 313
PGM-FI System ..................... 313
Ignition Timing Control
System................................. 313
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) System .................... 313
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ............................ 313
Replacement Parts..................... 313
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 314
State Emissions Testing ............... 315
Technical Information
303
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Identification Numbers
Your car has several identifying
numbers located in various places.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
Acura dealer uses to register your
car for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your car. The easiest place to find
the VIN is on a plate fastened to the
top of the dashboard. You can see it
by looking through the windshield
on the driver’s side. It is also on the
Certification label attached to the
driver’s doorjamb, and is stamped on
the engine compartment bulkhead.
The VIN is also provided in bar code
on the Certification label.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
304
Technical Information
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Identification Numbers
The Engine Number is stamped into
the engine block. It is on the front
left.
ENGINE NUMBER
The Transmission Number is on a
label on top of the transmission.
TRANSMISSION NUMBER
Technical Information
305
Table of Contents
Main Menu
Specifications
Dimensions
Length
Width
Height
Wheelbase
Track
Front
Rear
Weights
Gross vehicle weight rating
Air Conditioning
Refrigerant type
Charge quantity
Lubricant type
192.0 in (4,877 mm)
70.4 in (1,789 mm)
55.5 in (1,409 mm)
106.9 in (2,715 mm)
61.1 in (1,553 mm)
61.0 in (1,549 mm)
See the certification label attached
to the driver’s doorjamb.
HFC-134a (R-134a)
21.2−22.9 oz (600−650 g)
ND-OIL8
Capacities
Fuel tank
Approx.
17.17 US gal (65.0 , 14.30 Imp gal)
Engine
coolant
Engine oil
*1
Change
Total
Change*2
Including filter
Without filter
Total
Automatic
Change
transmission Total
fluid
U.S. Cars
Windshield
washer
Canada Cars
reservoir
1.48 US gal (5.6 , 1.23 Imp gal)
1.98 US gal (7.5 , 1.65 Imp gal)
4.6 US qt (4.4
4.2 US qt (4.0
5.3 US qt (5.0
3.1 US qt (2.9
7.6 US qt (7.2
, 3.9 Imp qt)
, 3.5 Imp qt)
, 4.4 Imp qt)
, 2.6 Imp qt)
, 6.3 Imp qt)
2.6 US qt (2.5 , 2.2 Imp qt)
4.8 US qt (4.5 , 4.0 Imp qt)
*1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine.
Reserve tank capacity:
0.16 US gal (0.6 , 0.13 Imp gal)
*2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine.
306
Technical Information
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Specifications
Lights
Headlights*1 (High beam)
12 V − 60 W (HB3)
Front turn signal/parking lights
12 V − 24/2.2 CP
Rear turn signal lights
12 V − 21 W
Stop/Taillights
12 V − 21/5 W
Stop/tail/side marker lights
12 V − 21/5 W
Road lamps
12 V − 6 CP (5 W)
High-mount brake light
12 V − 21 W
Front side marker lights
12 V − 5 W
Back-up lights
12 V − 21 W
License plate light
12 V − 3 CP
Ceiling light
12 V − 7 W
Spotlights
12 V − 5 W
Trunk light
12 V − 5 W
Door courtesy lights
12 V − 2 CP
Vanity mirror light
12 V − 1.1 W
Glove box light
12 V − 2 CP
*1
Low beam headlight bulbs are a type of high voltage discharge tube
(D2R).
Battery
Capacity
Fuses
Interior
Under-hood
12 V − 65 AH/20 HR
See pages 298 and 299 or the fuse
label attached to the inside of the
fuse box door on each side of the
dashboard.
See page 297 or the fuse box
cover.
Engine
Type
Bore x Stroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Spark plugs
Water cooled 4-stroke
SOHC VTEC 6-cylinder (V6)
gasoline engine
3.50 x 3.39 in (89.0 x 86.0 mm)
196 cu-in (3,210 cm )
9.8 : 1 *1
10.5 : 1 *2
See spark plug maintenance
section page 237 .
*1 : Premium model
*2 : Type-S
Alignment
Toe
Caster
Front
Rear
Front
Rear
Front
Tires
Size
Front/Rear
Camber
Pressure
Spare
Front/Rear
Spare
in
0.00 in (0.0 mm)
0.08 in (2.0 mm)
0°
−0°30’
2°50’
P205/60R16 91V *1
P215/50R17 93V *2
T135/80R16 101M
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
*1 : Premium model
*2 : Type-S
Technical Information
307
Main Menu
Table of Contents
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)
The tires on your car meet all U.S.
Federal Safety Requirements. All
tires are also graded for treadwear,
traction, and temperature performance according to Department of
Transportation (DOT) standards.
The following explains these
gradings.
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between the tread shoulder and the
maximum section width. For
example:
Treadwear 200
Traction AA
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform
to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
308
Technical Information
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government
test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and onehalf (1 1/2) times as well on the
government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of
tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
Traction − AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
Warning: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
traction characteristics.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Cars)
Temperature − A, B, C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
Warning: The temperature grade for
this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can
cause heat buildup and possible tire
failure.
Technical Information
309
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Oxygenated Fuels
Some conventional gasolines are
being blended with alcohol or an
ether compound. These gasolines
are collectively referred to as
oxygenated fuels. To meet clean air
standards, some areas of the United
States and Canada use oxygenated
fuels to help reduce emissions.
If you use an oxygenated fuel, be
sure it is unleaded and meets the
minimum octane rating requirement.
Before using an oxygenated fuel, try
to confirm the fuel’s contents. Some
states/provinces require this
information to be posted on the
pump.
310
Technical Information
The following are the U.S. EPA and
Canadian CGSB approved
percentages of oxygenates:
ETHANOL (ethyl or grain alcohol)
You may use gasoline containing up
to 10 percent ethanol by volume.
Gasoline containing ethanol may be
marketed under the name ‘‘Gasohol.’’
MTBE (Methyl Tertiary Butyl
Ether)
You may use gasoline containing up
to 15 percent MTBE by volume.
METHANOL (methyl or wood
alcohol)
Your vehicle was not designed to use
fuel that contains methanol.
Methanol can corrode metal parts in
the fuel system, and also damage
plastic and rubber components. This
damage would not be covered by
your warranties.
If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
service station or switch to another
brand of gasoline.
Fuel system damage or performance
problems resulting from the use of
an oxygenated fuel containing more
than the percentages of oxygenates
given above are not covered under
warranty.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Driving in Foreign Countries
If you are planning to take your
Acura outside the U.S. or Canada,
contact the tourist bureaus in the
areas you will be traveling in to find
out about the availability of unleaded
gasoline with the proper octane
rating.
If unleaded gasoline is not available,
be aware that using leaded gasoline
in your Acura will affect performance and fuel mileage, and damage
its emissions controls. It will no
longer comply with U.S. and
Canadian emissions regulations, and
will be illegal to operate in North
America. To bring your car back into
compliance will require the replacement of several components, such as
the oxygen sensors and the three
way catalytic converter. These replacements are not covered under
warranty.
Technical Information
311
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your car’s
engine produces several byproducts.
Some of these are carbon monoxide
(CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOx) and
hydrocarbons (HC). Gasoline
evaporating from the tank also
produces hydrocarbons. Controlling
the production of NOx, CO, and HC
is important to the environment.
Under certain conditions of sunlight
and climate, NOx and HC react to
form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ Carbon
monoxide does not contribute to
smog creation, but it is a poisonous
gas.
The Clean Air Act
The United States Clean Air Act*
sets standards for automobile
emissions. It also requires that
automobile manufacturers explain to
owners how their emissions controls
work and what to do to maintain
them. This section summarizes how
the emissions controls work.
Scheduled maintenance is on page
210 .
*
In Canada, Acura vehicles comply
with the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Safety Standards (CMVSS) for
Emissions valid at the time they are
manufactured.
Crankcase Emissions Control
System
Your car has a Positive Crankcase
Ventilation System. This keeps
gasses that build up in the engine’s
crankcase from going into the
atmosphere. The Positive Crankcase
Ventilation valve routes them from
312
Technical Information
the crankcase back to the intake
manifold. They are then drawn into
the engine and burned.
Evaporative Emissions Control
System
As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
tank, an evaporative emissions
control canister filled with charcoal
adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
canister while the engine is off. After
the engine is started and warmed up,
the vapor is drawn into the engine
and burned during driving.
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery
The Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery (ORVR) system captures
the fuel vapors during refueling. The
vapors are adsorbed in a canister
filled with activated carbon. While
driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
into the engine and burned off.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls
The exhaust emissions controls
include four systems: PGM-FI,
Ignition Timing Control, Exhaust
Gas Recirculation and Three Way
Catalytic Converter. These four
systems work together to control the
engine’s combustion and minimize
the amount of HC, CO, and NOx that
comes out the tailpipe. The exhaust
emissions control systems are
separate from the crankcase and
evaporative emissions control
systems.
Ignition Timing Control System
This system constantly adjusts the
ignition timing, reducing the amount
of HC, CO and NOx produced.
Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)
System
The Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) system takes some of the
exhaust gas and routes it back into
the intake manifold. Adding exhaust
gas to the air/fuel mixture reduces
the amount of NOx produced when
the fuel is burned.
PGM-FI System
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The PGM-FI System uses sequential
multiport fuel injection.
It has three subsystems: Air Intake,
Engine Control, and Fuel Control.
The Powertrain Control Module
(PCM) uses various sensors to
determine how much air is going
into the engine. It then controls how
much fuel to inject under all operating conditions.
The three way catalytic converter is
in the exhaust system. Through
chemical reactions, it converts HC,
CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
to carbon dioxide (CO2), dinitrogen
(N2), and water vapor.
Replacement Parts
The emissions control systems are
designed and certified to work together in reducing emissions to
levels that comply with the Clean Air
Act. To make sure the emissions
remain low, you should use only new
Genuine Acura replacement parts or
their equivalent for repairs. Using
lower quality parts may increase the
emissions from your car.
The emissions control systems are
covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your car. Read your
warranty manual for more information.
Technical Information
313
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The three way catalytic converter
contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Acura part
or its equivalent.
The three way catalytic converter
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take
place. It can set on fire any combustible materials that come near it.
Park your car away from high grass,
dry leaves, or other flammables.
Keep the engine tuned-up.
Have your car diagnosed and
repaired if it is misfiring, backfiring, stalling, or otherwise not
running properly.
THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
A defective three way catalytic
converter contributes to air pollution,
and can impair your engine’s performance. Follow these guidelines to
protect your car’s three way catalytic
converter.
Always use unleaded gasoline.
Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
314
Technical Information
Main Menu
Table of Contents
State Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes
If you take your vehicle for a state
emissions test shortly after the
battery has been disconnected or
gone dead, it may not pass the test.
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that must be set in the onboard diagnostics for the emissions
systems. These codes are erased
when the battery is disconnected,
and set again only after several days
of driving under a variety of
conditions.
If the testing facility determines that
the readiness codes are not set, you
will be requested to return at a later
date to complete the test. If you must
get the vehicle re-tested within the
next two or three days, you can
condition the vehicle for re-testing
by doing the following.
Make sure the gas tank is nearly,
but not completely, full (around
3/4).
Without touching the accelerator
pedal, start the engine and let it
idle for 20 seconds.
Keep the vehicle in Park .
Increase the engine speed to 2,000
rpm and hold it there until the
temperature gauge rises to at least
1/4 of the scale (approximately 3
minutes).
Make sure the vehicle has been
parked with the engine off for 8
hours or more.
Make sure the ambient
temperature is between 20° and
95°F.
CONTINUED
Technical Information
315
Main Menu
Table of Contents
State Emissions Testing
Select a nearby lightly traveled
major highway where you can
maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20
minutes. Drive on the highway in
D5. Do not use the cruise control.
When traffic allows, drive for 90
seconds without moving the
accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed
may vary slightly; this is okay.) If
you cannot do this for a
continuous 90 seconds because of
traffic conditions, drive for at least
30 seconds, then repeat it two
more times (for a total of 90
seconds).
Then drive in city/suburban
traffic for at least 10 minutes.
When traffic conditions allow, let
the vehicle coast for several
seconds without using the
accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal.
316
Technical Information
If the testing facility determines the
readiness codes are still not set, see
your Acura dealer.
Main Menu
Warranty and Customer Relations
Customer Relations
Information ................................. 318
Warranty Coverages ..................... 319
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S. Vehicles) ........................... 320
Authorized Manuals ...................... 321
Warranty and Customer Relations
317
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Customer Relations Information
Acura dealership personnel are
trained professionals. They should
be able to answer all your questions.
If you encounter a problem that your
dealership does not solve to your
satisfaction, please discuss it with
the dealership’s management. The
Service Manager or General
Manager can help. Almost all
problems are solved in this way.
In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
Islands:
If you are dissatisfied with the
decision made by the dealership’s
management, contact the Acura
Customer Relations Office.
CUSTOMER RELATIONS
RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÈLE
Vortex Motor Corp.
Bella International
P.O. Box 190816
San Juan, PR 00919-0816
Tel:(787) 250-4327
Canadian Owners:
U.S. Owners:
Acura Automobile Division
Client Services Office
American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
1919 Torrance Blvd.
Torrance, CA 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 382-2238
318
Warranty and Customer Relations
Honda Canada Inc.
715 Milner Avenue
Toronto, ON
M1B 2K8
Tel:1-888-9-ACURA-9
Fax:Toll-free 1-877-939-0909
Toronto (416) 287-4776
When you call or write, please give
us this information:
Vehicle Identification Number
(see page 304 )
Name and address of the dealer
who services your vehicle
Date of purchase
Mileage on your vehicle
Your name, address, and telephone number
A detailed description of the
problem
Name of the dealer who sold the
vehicle to you
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners
Your new Acura is covered by these
warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty −
covers your new vehicle, except for
the battery, emissions control
systems and accessories, against
defects in materials and
workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects
Warranty and Emissions
Performance Warranty − these two
warranties cover your vehicle’s emissions control systems. Time, mileage,
and coverage are conditional. Please
read the warranty manual for exact
information.
Original Equipment Battery Limited
Warranty − this warranty gives up
to 100 percent credit toward a
replacement battery.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat
belt that fails to function properly is
covered for the useful life of the
vehicle.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty
− all exterior body panels are
covered for rust-through from the
inside for the specified time period
with no mileage limit.
Accessory Limited Warranty −
genuine Acura Accessories are
covered under this warranty. Time
and mileage limits depend on the
type of accessory and other factors.
Please read your warranty manual
for details.
Replacement Parts Limited
Warranty − covers all genuine
Acura replacement parts against
defects in materials and workmanship.
Replacement Battery Limited
Warranty − provides prorated
coverage for a replacement battery
purchased from an Acura dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime
Limited Warranty − provides
coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the
vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to
all these warranties. Please read the
2002 Acura Warranty Information
booklet that came with your car for
precise information on warranty
coverages. Your Acura’s original
tires are covered by their
manufacturer. Tire warranty
information is in a separate booklet.
Canadian Owners
Please refer to the 2002 Warranty
Manual that came with your car.
Warranty and Customer Relations
319
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect which could cause a crash or
could cause injury or death, you
should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition
to notifying Acura Automobile
Division, American Honda Motor Co.,
Inc.
320
Warranty and Customer Relations
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation,
and if it finds that a safety defect
exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become
involved in individual problems
between you, your dealer, or Acura
Automobile Division, American
Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may either
call the Auto Safety Hotline toll-free
at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
Washington D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of
Transportation, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
Main Menu
Table of Contents
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals
(U.S. only)
The following publications covering the operation and
servicing of your vehicle can be obtained from Helm
Incorporated, either by filling out the attached form or,
for credit card holders, calling the toll-free phone number
on the form. For manuals prior to the year shown below,
contact Helm Incorporated, P.O. Box 07280, Detroit,
Michigan 48207, or call 1-800-782-4356.
Publication
Form Number
61S3M01
Form Description
Price
Each*
$67.00
2001 − 2002 Acura 3.2 CL
Service Manual
$45.00
2001 − 2002 Acura 3.2 CL
61S3M01EL
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual
$42.00
2001 − 2002 Acura 3.2 CL
61S3M30
Body Repair Manual
$35.00
2002 Acura 3.2 CL
31S3M610
Owner’s Manual
$27.00
2002 Acura 3.2 CL
31S3M710
Navigation Manual
FREE
Order Form for Previous YearsACU-R
Indicate Year and Model Desired
*
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring
obligation.
Valid only for sales within the U.S. Canadian owners should
contact their authorized Acura dealer.
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. − 6:00 P.M. EST
MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
OR
By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
VEHICLE MODEL
2
0
0
2
PUBLICATION NUMBER
Price
Total
Each*
Price
Qty
Name
Year
A
C
U
*
Prices are subject to change without
notice and without incurring obligation.
Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please
allow adequate time for delivery.
TOTAL MATERIAL
Mich. Purchases
Add 6% Sales Tax
HANDLING CHARGE
$6.00
GRAND TOTAL
321
Table of Contents
Main Menu
Authorized Manuals
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,
and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should
be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown
below for a quotation.
S
H
I
P
T
O
Customer Name
Attention
Street Address − No P.O. Box Number
Apartment Number
City
State & Zip Code
Daytime Telephone Number
P
A
Y
M
E
N
T
(
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
This manual complements the Service Manual by
providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
electrical circuit in your vehicle.
)
Body Repair Manual:
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
replacement of damaged body parts.
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc − U.S. funds only.
Do not send cash
Master
Card
VISA
Check here if your billing address is different
from the shipping address shown above.
Account Number
Expiration: Mo. Yr.
−
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE
DATE
These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
322
Service Manual:
This manual covers maintenance and recommended
procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
It is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simple
enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to understand.
Main Menu
Index
A
Accessories and Modifications .... 169
Accessories................................. 169
Additional Safety Precautions .. 170
Modifications ............................. 170
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key
Position) ........................................ 76
Accessory Power Sockets............. 109
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 220
Airbag (SRS) .......................... 9, 43, 45
Air Cleaner Element ...................... 233
Air Conditioning System ............... 114
Maintenance ............................... 243
Usage .................................. 116, 121
Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 246
Alarm, Anti-theft ............................ 149
Alcohol in Gasoline ........................ 310
Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning........ 267
Antifreeze ....................................... 223
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
Indicator ................................ 56, 189
Operation .................................... 188
Anti-theft, Audio System............... 149
Anti-theft Steering Column
Lock ............................................... 76
Anti-theft System ........................... 150
Appearance Care ........................... 265
Armrest ............................................. 91
Audio Controls, Remote................ 148
Audio System ................................. 127
Automatic Climate Control
System......................................... 114
Automatic Lighting Off Feature .... 66
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners .................................... 41
Automatic Speed Control.............. 151
Automatic Transmission............... 178
Capacity, Fluid ........................... 306
Checking Fluid Level ................ 230
Sequential SportShift Mode ..... 181
Shifting ........................................ 178
Shift Lever Position Indicator .. 178
Shift Lever Positions ................. 179
Shift Lock Release ..................... 185
Maintenance ............................... 238
Specifications ............................. 307
Before Driving ............................... 161
Belts, Seat ..................................... 8, 40
Beverage Holder ............................ 104
Body Repair .................................... 272
Brakes
Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 188
Break-in, New Linings .............. 162
Bulb Replacement ..................... 258
Fluid ............................................ 231
Parking ........................................ 102
System Indicator .................. 55, 292
Wear Indicators ......................... 187
Braking System.............................. 187
Break-in, New Car ......................... 162
Brightness Control, Instruments ... 67
Brights, Headlights ......................... 65
B
Battery
Charging System
Indicator............................ 55, 289
Jump Starting ............................. 283
CONTINUED
I
Main Menu
Index
Bulb Replacement
Back-up Lights ........................... 258
Brake Lights............................... 258
Front Side Marker Lights......... 257
Headlights .................................. 254
High-mount Brake Light .......... 259
Interior Lights ............................ 260
License Plate Light .................... 260
Road Lamps ................................ 256
Specifications ............................. 307
Trunk Light ................................ 262
Turn Signal Lights ..................... 257
Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 254
C
Capacities Chart............................. 306
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 49
Carrying, Cargo ............................. 171
Cassette Player
Care ............................................. 138
Operation .................................... 134
CAUTION, Explanation of ............... ii
CD Changer.................................... 139
Ceiling Light ................................... 110
Certification Label ......................... 304
II
Chains ............................................. 251
Changing Oil
How to ......................................... 221
When to....................................... 210
Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 275
Changing Engine Coolant ............. 225
Charging System Indicator .... 55, 289
Checklist, Before Driving ............. 176
Child Safety ...................................... 20
Child Seats ........................................ 24
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 39
Cleaner Element, Air ..................... 233
Cleaning
Aluminum Wheels ..................... 267
Carpeting .................................... 268
Exterior ....................................... 266
Fabric .......................................... 269
Interior ........................................ 268
Leather ........................................ 269
Seat Belts .................................... 269
Vinyl ............................................ 269
Windows ..................................... 270
Wood Trim ................................. 270
Climate Control System ................ 114
Clock, Setting the .......................... 102
Coat Hook ....................................... 107
Code, Audio System ...................... 149
CO in the Exhaust ......................... 312
Coin Box ......................................... 105
Cold Weather, Starting in ............. 177
Compact Spare ............................... 274
Console Compartment .................. 105
Console Pocket .............................. 106
Consumer Information*................ 318
Controls, Instruments and .............. 51
Coolant
Adding ......................................... 223
Checking ..................................... 167
Proper Solution .......................... 223
Replacing .................................... 225
Temperature Gauge .................... 62
Corrosion Protection ..................... 271
Courtesy Lights ............................. 111
Crankcase Emissions Control
System......................................... 312
Cruise Control Operation ............. 151
Customer Relations Office ........... 318
D
DANGER, Explanation of ................. ii
Dashboard .................................... 2, 52
Main Menu
Index
Daytime Running Lights................. 67
Defects, Reporting Safety............. 320
Defogger, Rear Window ................. 70
Defrosting the Windows....... 120, 125
Dimensions ..................................... 306
Dimming the Headlights ................ 65
Dipstick
Automatic Transmission........... 230
Engine Oil ................................... 165
Directional Signals ........................... 67
Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 187
Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 222
Doors
Lockout Prevention ..................... 78
Monitor Light ............................... 58
Power Door Locks ....................... 77
DOT Tire Quality Grading ........... 308
Drive Belts ...................................... 244
Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 5
Driving ............................................ 175
Economy ..................................... 168
In Bad Weather .......................... 196
In Foreign Countries ................. 311
Driving Position Memory
System ........................................... 95
Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 244
E
Economy, Fuel ............................... 168
Emergencies on the Road............. 273
Battery, Jump Starting .............. 283
Brake System Indicator ............ 292
Changing a Flat Tire ................. 275
Charging System Indicator ...... 289
Checking the Fuses................... 295
Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 288
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 290
Manually Closing Moonroof .... 293
Overheated Engine ................... 286
Emergency Brake .......................... 102
Emergency Flashers ....................... 70
Emergency Towing ....................... 300
Emergency Trunk Opener ............. 84
Emissions Controls........................ 312
Emissions Testing, State .............. 315
Engine
Belts............................................. 244
Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 62
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp ................................. 55, 290
Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 55, 288
Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 219
Overheating................................ 286
Specifications ............................. 307
Speed Limiter ............................. 184
Starting........................................ 177
Ethanol in Gasoline ....................... 310
Evaporative Emissions Controls .. 312
Exhaust Fumes ................................ 49
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
System......................................... 313
Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
Belts by ......................................... 18
Exterior, Cleaning the ................... 266
F
Fan, Interior ........................... 118, 123
Features, Comfort and
Convenience ............................... 113
Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 163
Filters
Air Cleaner ................................. 233
Dust and Pollen .......................... 244
Oil ................................................ 221
Flashers, Hazard Warning.............. 70
CONTINUED
III
Main Menu
Index
Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 275
Floor Mats ...................................... 268
Fluids
Automatic Transmission........... 230
Brake ........................................... 231
Power Steering........................... 232
Windshield Washers ................. 229
FM Stereo Radio
Reception ............................ 128, 132
Foreign Countries, Driving in ...... 311
Four-way Flashers ........................... 70
Front Airbags ............................... 9, 43
Fuel .................................................. 162
Fill Door and Cap....................... 163
Gauge ............................................ 62
Octane Requirement ................. 162
Oxygenated ................................ 310
Reserve Indicator......................... 59
Tank, Filling the......................... 163
Fuses, Checking the ...................... 294
G
Gasohol ........................................... 310
Gasoline .......................................... 162
Fuel Reserve Indicator ................ 59
IV
Gauge ............................................ 62
Octane Requirement ................. 162
Tank, Filling the......................... 163
Gas Station Procedures................. 163
Gauges .............................................. 60
Engine Coolant Temperature .... 62
Fuel ................................................ 62
Maintenance Required
Indicator .................................... 63
Speedometer ................................ 60
Tachometer .................................. 60
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight
Rating) ........................................ 199
Gearshift Lever Positions ............. 179
Glass Cleaning ............................... 270
Glove Box ......................................... 85
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) ........................................ 199
H
Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 254
Hazard Warning Flashers............... 70
Headlights
Aiming ......................................... 254
Automatic Lighting Off
Feature ...................................... 66
Daytime Running Lights............. 67
High Beam Indicator ................... 58
Reminder Chime .......................... 65
Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 254
Turning on .................................... 65
Head Restraints ............................... 90
High Altitude, Starting at .............. 177
High-Low Beam Switch .................. 65
High-mount Brake Light............... 259
HomeLink Universal
Transceiver................................. 155
Hood Latch ..................................... 233
Hood, Opening the ........................ 164
Horn................................................... 64
Hydroplaning.................................. 197
I
Identification Number, Vehicle.... 304
Ignition
Keys............................................... 73
Switch ............................................ 75
Timing Control System ............. 313
Immobilizer System......................... 74
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6
Main Menu
Index
Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 53
Infant Restraint ................................ 28
Infant Seats ....................................... 29
Tether Anchorage Points ........... 39
Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 245
Inside Mirror .................................... 93
Inspection, Tire .............................. 247
Instrument Panel ............................. 53
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 67
Interior Cleaning ............................ 268
Interior Lights ................................ 110
Introduction ......................................... i
J
Jacking up the Car ......................... 277
Jack, Tire ........................................ 276
Jump Starting ................................. 283
K
Keys ................................................... 73
L
Label, Certification ........................ 304
Lane Change, Signaling .................. 67
Lap/Shoulder Belt ........................... 40
Leather, Cleaning .......................... 269
Lights
Bulb Replacement ..................... 254
Ceiling ......................................... 110
Courtesy...................................... 111
Indicator ........................................ 53
Parking .......................................... 65
Turn Signal ................................... 67
Load Limit ...................................... 172
LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ....... 76
Lockout Prevention ......................... 78
Locks
Anti-theft Steering Column ........ 76
Fuel Fill Door ............................. 163
Glove Box ..................................... 85
Power Door .................................. 77
Rear Console Compartment ....... 85
Trunk ............................................ 82
Trunk Pass-through Cover ......... 92
Low Coolant Level ......................... 167
Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 59
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 55, 288
Lubricant Specifications
Chart ........................................... 306
Luggage .......................................... 171
M
Maintenance ................................... 205
Owner Maintenance Checks.... 217
Record .................................. 215-216
Required Indicator ....................... 63
Safety........................................... 206
Schedule .............................. 210-214
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .. 55, 290
Memory, Driving Position .............. 95
Meters, Gauges ................................ 60
Methanol in Gasoline .................... 310
Mirrors, Adjusting ........................... 93
Moonroof ........................................ 101
Closing Manually ....................... 293
Operation .................................... 101
N
Neutral Gear Position.................... 181
New Vehicle Break-in ................... 162
NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i
Numbers, Identification ................ 304
CONTINUED
V
Main Menu
Index
O
Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 162
Odometer .......................................... 61
Odometer, Trip ................................ 61
Oil
Change, How to ......................... 221
Change, When to ....................... 210
Checking Engine ....................... 165
Pressure Indicator ............... 55, 288
Selecting Proper Viscosity
Chart ....................................... 220
ON (Ignition Key Position) ............ 76
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery ..................................... 312
Operation in Foreign Countries ... 311
Outside Mirrors ............................... 93
Outside Temperature Indicator ..... 62
Overheating, Engine ..................... 286
Owner Maintenance Checks ........ 217
Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 310
Park Gear Position......................... 180
Parking ............................................ 186
Parking Brake ................................ 102
Parking Brake and Brake
System Indicator .................. 55, 292
Parking Lights.................................. 65
Parking Over Things that Burn ... 314
PGM-FI System.............................. 313
Polishing and Waxing ................... 267
Pre-Drive Safety Checklist ............. 11
Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 18
Protecting Adults ............................. 12
Additional Safety Precautions .... 19
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 18
Protecting Children ......................... 20
Protecting Infants ........................ 28
Protecting Larger Children ........ 35
Protecting Small Children .......... 32
Using Child Seats with
Tethers...................................... 39
R
P
Paint Touch-up ............................... 267
Panel Brightness Control ............... 67
VI
Radiator Overheating .................... 286
Radio/Cassette/CD Sound
System......................................... 127
Readiness Codes ............................ 291
Rear Console Compartment ........... 85
Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement ... 258
Rear Seat Access ............................. 89
Rear Seat Armrest ........................... 91
Rear View Mirror ............................. 93
Rear Window Defogger .................. 70
Reclining the Seat Backs ................ 87
Reminder Lights .............................. 53
Remote Transmitter ........................ 78
Replacement Information
Air Cleaner Element .................. 233
Dust and Pollen Filter ............... 244
Engine Coolant........................... 225
Engine Oil and Filter ................. 221
Fuses ........................................... 295
Light Bulbs ................................. 254
Schedule ..................................... 208
Spark Plugs................................. 235
Tires ............................................ 249
Wiper Blades .............................. 241
Replacing Seat Belts After a
Crash ............................................. 42
Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant .... 167
Restraint, Child ................................ 20
Reverse Gear Position................... 180
Main Menu
Index
Road Lamps ...................................... 65
Rotation, Tire ................................. 248
S
Safety Belts ......................................... 8
Safety Defects, Reporting* .......... 320
Safety Features .................................. 7
Airbags ............................................ 9
Door Locks ................................... 10
Head Restraints ........................... 10
Seat Belts ........................................ 8
Seats & Seat-Backs ...................... 10
Safety Labels, Location of .............. 50
Safety Messages ................................ ii
Seat Belts ...................................... 8, 40
Additional Information ................ 40
Automatic Seat Belt
Tensioners ................................ 41
Child Seat Anchor Plate .............. 39
Cleaning ...................................... 269
Lap/Shoulder Belt ................. 15, 40
Maintenance ................................. 42
Reminder Light and
Beeper ................................. 40, 55
System Components.................... 40
Use During Pregnancy................ 18
Seat Heaters ..................................... 98
Seat Position Memory ..................... 95
Seats, Adjusting the ......................... 86
Security System ............................. 150
Sequential SportShift Mode ......... 181
Serial Number ................................ 304
Service Intervals ............................ 210
Service Manual* ............................ 321
Service Station Procedures .......... 163
Setting the Clock ........................... 102
Shift Lever Position Indicator ...... 178
Shift Lock Release ......................... 185
Side Airbags ..................................... 45
Side Airbag Cutoff Indicator .......... 47
Side Marker Lights, Bulb
Replacement ............................... 257
Signaling Turns ................................ 67
Snow Tires ...................................... 251
Solvent-type Cleaners .................... 266
Sound System ................................. 127
Spare Tire
Inflating ....................................... 274
Specifications ............................. 307
Spark Plugs, Replacing ................. 235
Specifications Charts..................... 306
Speed Control ................................. 151
Speedometer .................................... 60
Spotlights ........................................ 110
SRS, Additional Information........... 43
Additional Safety Precautions .... 48
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 46
How Your Airbags Work ...... 43, 45
SRS Components ......................... 43
SRS Service................................... 48
SRS Indicator.............................. 46, 56
START (Ignition Key Position) ..... 76
Starting the Engine........................ 177
In Cold Weather at High
Altitude ................................... 177
With a Dead Battery ................. 283
State Emissions Testing ............... 315
Steam Coming from Engine ......... 286
Steering Wheel
Adjustment ................................... 71
Anti-theft Column Lock .............. 76
Stereo Sound System .................... 127
Storing Your Car ............................ 263
Storage Tray ................................... 107
Sun Visor......................................... 108
CONTINUED
VII
Main Menu
Index
Sunglasses Holder ......................... 103
Supplemental Restraint
System................................... 9, 43
Servicing ....................................... 48
SRS Indicator.......................... 46, 56
System Components.................... 43
Synthetic Oil ................................... 220
T
Tachometer ...................................... 60
Taillights, Changing Bulbs ........... 258
Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 273
Tape Player..................................... 134
Technical Descriptions
DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 308
Emissions Control Systems ...... 312
Oxygenated Fuels...................... 310
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ................................ 314
Temperature Gauge ........................ 62
Tether Anchorage Points ............... 39
Theft Protection............................. 149
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 314
Time, Setting the ........................... 102
Timing Belt ..................................... 245
VIII
Tire Chains ..................................... 251
Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 275
Tires ................................................ 245
Air Pressure ............................... 246
Checking Wear .......................... 247
Compact Spare ........................... 274
DOT Tire Quality Grading ....... 308
Inflation ....................................... 245
Inspection ................................... 247
Replacing .................................... 249
Rotating....................................... 248
Snow ............................................ 251
Specifications ............................. 307
Traction Devices........................ 251
Winter Driving ........................... 250
Tools, Tire Changing .................... 275
Towing
A Trailer ...................................... 198
Emergency Wrecker ................. 300
Traction Control System (TCS)
Indicator ................................ 57, 192
Operation .................................... 190
Traction Devices ............................ 251
Transmission
Checking Fluid Level,
Automatic ............................... 230
Fluid Selection............................ 230
Identification Number ............... 305
Shifting the Automatic .............. 178
Treadwear ...................................... 308
Trip Meter ........................................ 61
Trunk................................................. 82
Emergency Trunk Opener ......... 84
Opening the .................................. 82
Open Monitor Light .................... 58
Turn Signals ..................................... 67
U
Underside, Cleaning ...................... 271
Unexpected, Taking Care
of the ........................................... 273
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..... 308
Unleaded Gasoline......................... 162
Upholstery Cleaning...................... 269
Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 222
V
Vanity Mirror ................................. 108
Vehicle Capacity Load .................. 172
Vehicle Dimensions....................... 306
Main Menu
Index
Vehicle Identification Number..... 304
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
System..................................... 193
VSA System Indicator ......... 57, 194
VSA Activation Indicator .... 57, 193
VSA Off Switch .......................... 194
Vehicle Storage .............................. 263
Ventilation ...................................... 114
VIN .................................................. 304
Vinyl Cleaning ................................ 269
Viscosity, Oil................................... 220
W
WARNING, Explanation of .............. ii
Warning Labels, Location of .......... 50
Warranty Coverages* ................... 319
Washer, Windshield
Checking the Fluid Level ......... 229
Indicator ........................................ 59
Operation ...................................... 69
Washing .......................................... 266
Waxing and Polishing ................... 267
Wheels
Adjusting the Steering ................ 71
Alignment and Balance ............. 248
Cleaning Aluminum Alloys ....... 267
Compact Spare ........................... 274
Windows
Cleaning ...................................... 270
Operating the Power ................... 99
Rear, Defogger ............................ 70
Windshield
Cleaning ........................................ 68
Defroster ............................ 120, 125
Washers ........................................ 69
Wipers, Windshield
Changing Blades ........................ 241
Operation ...................................... 68
Wood Trim ..................................... 270
Worn Tires ..................................... 247
Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 300
*
U.S. and Canada only
IX
Main Menu
Service Information Summary
Gasoline:
Premium unleaded gasoline,
pump octane number of 91 or
higher.
Fuel Tank Capacity:
17.17 US gal (65.0 , 14.30 Imp gal)
Recommended Engine Oil:
API Premium grade 5W-20
detergent oil (see page 219 ).
Oil change capacity (including
filter):
4.6 US qt (4.4 , 3.9 Imp qt)
Automatic Transmission Fluid:
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or
a DEXRON III ATF as a
temporary replacement (see page
230 ).
Power Steering Fluid:
Honda Power Steering Fluid
preferred, or another brand of
power steering fluid as a
temporary replacement. Do not
use ATF (see page 232 ).
Brake Fluid:
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
replacement (see page 231 ).
Tire Pressure (measured cold):
Front/Rear:
32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
Spare Tire Pressure:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement